You are on page 1of 129

TECHNOLOGY TRAINING

www.awardsolutions.com
4G LTE VoLTE LTE-ADVANCED IMS TD-LTE HSPA+ SMALL CELLS

DAS SDN NFV IP CONVERGENCE IPv6 CLOUD M2M TECHNOLOGY TRENDS

2015 CATALOG

Why Award?
Integrity
-


We are a trusted vendor for more than


255 corporate customers, including the
leading manufacturers and service providers
in the telecom industry

Expertise
- We have delivered more than 305,000
student days and more than 2.4 million
training hours since 1997
- We have hands-on experience from design
to deployment
- Our staff collectively holds more than 110
patents in communications technologies

Flexibility
- We save you time with customized content
and training solutions to meet project specific needs

About this Catalog


Our course catalog contains an overview of our company, services, and course portfolio for both Instructor
Led and eLearning delivery methods.
Let us help you and your team become an expert in advanced wireless and IP technologies. Simply go
straight to a curriculum, or browse through the catalog to view the comprehensive training solutions and
services offered by Award Solutions.
We provide cutting-edge training courses at the highest quality. The course descriptions in this catalog are
subject to change and new course descriptions are added to curriculums throughout the year. Please visit
Awards website at www.awardsolutions.com or contact us at +1-972-664-0727 ext. 306 for the latest
information.

- We can schedule training when and where


you need it, with a global footprint of
delivering training in more than 40 countries
- Our delivery methods give you cost-effective
options, whether the preference is on-site,
virtual, or self-paced eLearning

Excellent Return on Investment


- We help teams ramp up on new technologies
quickly and efficiently

Table of Contents
Why Award?....................................................... i

Company Overview...................................................... 1
Instructor Led Training................................................ 2
Self-paced eLearning.................................................. 3
Recommended Learning Maps.................................. 4
Course Index............................................................125

4G LTE............................................................... 9
Self-paced eLearning
[LTE_109] Welcome to LTE (e)................................. 10
[LTE_102] LTE Overview (e)......................................11
[LTE_103] LTE SAE Evolved Packet Core (EPC) Overview (e)...12
[LTE_111] LTE Air Interface Signaling Overview (e)...13
[LTE_113] Overview of IPv6 for LTE Networks (e)... 14
* [LTE_117] eMBMS Overview (e)...............................15
* [LTE_118] Welcome to VoLTE (e)............................. 16
[LTE_112] VoLTE Overview (e).................................. 17
[TRND103] Overview of OFDM (e)...........................18
[TRND104] Multiple Antenna Techniques (e)..........19
* [TRND106] Small Cell Overview (e).........................20
Instructor Led
[LTE_101] LTE Essentials.......................................... 21
[LTE_205] LTE Technology Overview........................22
[LTE_114] LTE-Advanced Essentials........................23
[LTE_310] LTE-Advanced Technical Overview......... 24
[LTE_301] Mastering LTE Air Interface....................25
[LTE_309] Mastering TD-LTE Air Interface...............26
[LTE_302] LTE Protocols and Signaling................... 27
[LTE_305] LTE-EPC Networks and Signaling...........28

* [LTE_313] LTE-EPC Networks and Signaling (Architecture, Attach)...29


* [LTE_425] eMBMS Protocols and Signaling............30
* [LTE_424] SON: Self Organizing Network Features in LTE and LTE-Advanced...31

[LTE_116] VoLTE Essentials.....................................32


[LTE_207] Exploring IMS/VoLTE Networks..............33
[LTE_203] VoLTE and IMS in LTE-EPC Networks.....34
* [LTE_427] VoLTE Signaling and Operations............35
[LTE_115] LTE RAN Performance Essentials..........36
[LTE_401] LTE RF Planning and Design Certification Workshop...37
[LTE_408] LTE RAN Capacity Planning Certification Workshop...38
[LTE_405] LTE RAN Signaling and Operations Certification...39
* [LTE_418] LTE RAN Signaling and Operations: Part 1 - Attach...40

* [LTE_419] LTE RAN Signaling and Operations: Part 2 Mobility, QoS, Traffic...41
* [LTE_420] LTE RAN Signaling and Operations: Part 3 - Interworking (GSM/UMTS)..42
* [LTE_415] RF Design Workshop: Part 1 - LTE..........43
* [LTE_416] RF Design Workshop: Part 2 - VoLTE and Small Cells...44

4G LTE (continued)
Instructor Led (continued)

[LTE_412] LTE RF Optimization Certification Workshop (UE Based)...45

* [LTE_421] LTE RF Optimization: Part 1 Coverage and Accessibility...46


* [LTE_422] LTE RF Optimization: Part 2 Downlink and Uplink Throughput...47
* [LTE_423] LTE RF Optimization: Part 3 Mobility and Inter-RAT...48
[TRND206] Small Cell Technical Overview..............49
* [LTE_208] Small Cell RF Planning Workshop..........50

[LTE_413] Small Cell and VoLTE RF Planning and Design Certification Workshop..51

[TRND205] DAS Technical Overview........................52

NETWORK TRANSFORMATION...................... 85
Self-paced eLearning

* [NWTF101] Welcome to SDN (Software-Defined Networks) (e)...86


* [NWTF102] Welcome to Virtualization (e)............... 87
* [NWTF104] Welcome to Mobile CSP Network Transformation (e)...88
* [NWTF105] SDN Overview (e)..................................89
* [NWTF106] NFV Overview (e)...................................90
* [NWTF107] OpenStack Cloud Overview (e)............. 91
* [NWTF108] API Overview (e)....................................92
* [NWTF109] Big Data Overview (e)...........................93
Instructor Led

* [NWTF110] API Essentials........................................94


IP CONVERGENCE & IMS.............................. 53
Self-paced eLearning
[IPC_103] Welcome to IP Networking (e)................54
[IPC_104] IP Convergence Overview (e)..................55
[IPC_106] Overview of MPLS (e)..............................56
[IPC_107] Overview of IMS (e).................................. 57
[IPC_108] Voice and Video over IP (VoIP) Overview (e)...58

[IPC_109] IP Quality of Service (QoS) (e).................59


[IPC_110] Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) (e)........60
[IPC_114] IP Basics (e)............................................. 61
[IPC_113] IP Routing (e)...........................................62
[IPC_115] QoS in IP Networks (e)............................63
[IPC_117] TCP and Transport Layer Protocols (e)...64
[IPC_119] Ethernet Basics (e)..................................65
[IPC_118] Ethernet VLANs (e)..................................66
[IPC_116] Ethernet Bridging (e)...............................67
[IPC_122] Ethernet Backhaul Overview (e).............68
[IPC_120] Interconnecting IP Networks (e).............69
[IPC_121] Welcome to IPv6 (e)................................70
Instructor Led
[IPC_101] IP Convergence Essentials...................... 71
[IPC_203] Exploring MPLS.......................................72
[IPC_204] Exploring IMS (R8)...................................73
SIP and Diameter for IMS/VoLTE............................. 74
[IPC_211] Exploring TCP/IP Protocols.....................75
[IPC_102] Ethernet Backhaul Essentials................ 76
[IPC_205] Exploring Ethernet Backhaul.................. 77
[IPC_301] Ethernet Backhaul Planning...................78
[IPC_405] IP Networking Workshop for LTE....................79
[IPC_406] IP Networking Workshop for 4G Backhaul...80

[IPC_207] Exploring IP Routing and Ethernet Bridging...81

[IPC_407] IP Routing and Ethernet Bridging Workshop... 82


[IPC_202] Exploring IPv6..........................................83
[IPC_409] IPv6 Networking Workshop for LTE Networks...84

[NWTF103] Big Data Essentials...............................95

* Cloud Computing Fundamentals........................................... 96


* [NWTF705] Mobile CSP Network Architecture and Operations...97
[NWTF204] Exploring Network Transformation with Cloud, SDN, NFV, API, and Big Data...98

* Software-Defined Networking (SDN) Essentials.....99


* [NWTF704] Exploring Software-Defined Networking (SDN) for Network Operators...100
* [NWTF402] Software-Defined Networking (SDN) Hands-on Workshop...101
* Software-Defined Networking (SDN) Troubleshooting Workshop...102
[NWTF203] Exploring Network Functions Virtualization (NFV)..103

* Exploring NFV as Application of OpenStack and SDN...104


* NFV Application Planning and Design Workshop...105
* NFV Application Troubleshooting Workshop..........106
* OpenStack Cloud IaaS Essentials..........................107

[NWTF401] OpenStack Cloud Hands-On Workshop...108

* Architecting and Building an OpenStack IaaS (Basic).. 109


Wireless Landscape....................................111
Self-paced eLearning
[FUND106] Wi-Fi Overview (e)................................112
[FUND104] Welcome to Wireless Networks (e)....113
[UMTS102] Welcome to UMTS (e).........................114
[UMTS103] Overview of UMTS (e)..........................115

[UMTS104] UMTS/WCDMA Air Interface Fundamentals (e)...116

[UMTS105] UMTS Signaling (e)..............................117


[UMTS106] UMTS Mobility (e)................................118
[UMTS109] HSPA+ Overview (R7) (e)....................119
Instructor Led
[TRND204] Wi-Fi Technical Overview....................120
Exploring Wireless Landscape, IP Convergence, and 4G...121
[FUND203] Exploring Wireless Technologies and Networks...122

[FUND204] Fundamentals of RF Engineering.......123

[FUND201] Exploring GSM/EGPRS/UMTS/HSPA/HSPA+... 124

* New Course

(e) eLearning Course

Company Overview
AWARD SOLUTIONS, INC. has over 17

CONTENT

FLEXIBILITY

years of training excellence in advanced wireless,


IP, and network transformation technologies. Our
products and services provide our customers with
innovative, flexible, and cost-effective solutions that
help rapidly boost workforce productivity to more
quickly meet market demands.

Our priority has always been on developing content


thats valuable to the students and presented in a
way that is easy to understand. We present the big
picture and pull the details together to explain how
they relate.

We offer flexibility in our course content, scheduling


choices, and provide multiple delivery options. Every
course from Award Solutions is tailored during the
course delivery to meet the specific needs of the
audience.

The level of technical depth in our training


programs gives students unique benefits that they
can apply immediately. We offer a range of courses
appropriate for audiences needing a high-level
overview, engineers looking for technical details
as well as sales and marketing teams needing a
different point of view.

ANALOGIES

EXPERTISE

We use various techniques to simplify complex


technologies. Analogies in our courses are
abundant and easy to comprehend, relating
concepts to real-life scenarios.

Our Subject Matter Experts (SMEs) and consultants


are best-in-class, having achieved substantial
industry experience in areas such as product
definition and development, network deployment,
and network and systems engineering. We strive
to help our students and customers become an
expert.
Award Solutions constantly keeps a finger on the
pulse of the industry, always researching new
technologies, and updating our curriculums to stay
on the cutting edge.
Whether you are a training manager responsible for
a large organization, or a team lead responsible for
enhancing your teams skills, Award Solutions can
meet your technology training needs.

TRAINING FACTS
98% of those taking Award classes
would recommend them to others
255+ corporate clients including leading
operators and manufacturers worldwide
More than 100,000 student training
days delivered on LTE since 2007
More than 305,000 student days and
2.4 million training hours delivered since
1997
Average course evaluation is 4.5 out of 5
Our Subject Matter Experts (SMEs) have
an average of 23 years of experience in
the wireless industry

2015 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727

Our courses are designed, developed and delivered


by our own industry experts who have a wealth of
relevant experience and a passion for teaching.
Not only do our Subject Matter Experts (SMEs)
understand the technology, they know how to
teach it, emphasize the key points, repeat whats
important, and bring in analogies and examples as
needed. They are focused on knowledge transfer
and dont teach just by the book, instead adapting
to the students needs. They bring invaluable
knowledge into the classroom because they can
relate the theory to real-world experiences.

ENGAGING
We leverage the latest technology to create
engaging, interactive courses regardless of the
delivery format. Keeping participants engaged is
paramount.

OUR PROMISE
To continually demonstrate our core values: Integrity,
Expertise, Flexibility, Teamwork and Excellent Return
on Investment.

Instructor Led Training


Award Solutions offers programs designed for
technical roles as well as business roles. Our
Subject Matter Experts (SMEs) blend accurate,
relevant content with insightful analogies and a
touch of humor, providing students with a rich
learning experience. We also tailor the content
during class to the specific background and
experience of the students.

In an effort to help organizations determine the


effectiveness of our training programs, we offer
Skills Assessment. The results offer a tangible
measurement of the knowledge growth and overall
course effectiveness. The final report includes
the pre-course score and post-course score along
with the percentage of improvement for each
participant.

Our technical courses span introductory to


advanced brimming with technical details. The
level of technical depth in our advanced courses
is unique to the marketplace. Award Solutions is
known for teaching beyond the facts. We bring
you the big picture view, and explain the hows and
the whys, along with the factual details. Our goal
is to provide students with a good understanding
of the technology, answer questions, and equip
participants to apply their newly acquired
knowledge, ultimately increasing productivity.

All students that participate in our Instructor


Led courses receive illustrated color course
books, which include the presentation slides and
comprehensive text explaining the key points. In
addition, Award Solutions provides students with
an eBook and the SMEs tablet classroom notes.

Our Technology for Business curriculum caters to


the executive, sales, and marketing roles, which
is designed to help business-savvy professionals
understand the direction of the industry and
impact of new technologies to gain confidence
and credibility. (Located in a separate, dedicated
catalog. Please contact us for more details.)
We offer highly customized training and consulting
solutions. We can integrate topics from multiple
courses to deliver only the information important
to you and your team. We can also integrate our
training programs with your specific tools and/or
product-specific information.

ON-SITE TRAINING

Our Subject Matter Experts travel to


your facility to engage the students in an
interactive learning experience.
Students can
receive answers
to their questions
during class or
in one-on-one
sessions during
breaks. Our SMEs
are also accessible via e-mail after the course
completes.

VIRTUAL TRAINING

Award Solutions embraces different


learning styles and preferences.
Our Virtual Training programs are conducted
by our SMEs in real-time. Students login to the

2015 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727

course from the comfort of their home or office


and engage in an expert-led interactive learning
experience. For teams that are geographically
dispersed, clients save on travel and living
expenses and maximize productivity and learning.
Award Solutions
virtual training
environment adds
a new dimension
of learning. Our
SMEs encourage
questions and promote discussions. The sessions
are highly interactive and very effective.

PUBLIC TRAINING EVENTS

Award Solutions hosts a subset of our


courses in our office and in conjunction
with Industry events. This expert-led sessions are
ideal for individuals and small groups. Visit our
website at www.awardsolutions.com or
www.LTEuniversity.com for the latest schedule.
Scan our QR code to check out the
latest public training schedule.

CERTIFICATIONS

Becoming an Award Certified Expert


(A.C.E.) is the best way to for a student
to demonstrate expertise, prove their ability to use
real-world industry tools, and validate that they
have the required knowledge to implement and/
or run a successful network. Visit our website for a
more detailed look at certifications.

Self-paced eLearning
Award Solutions flexibility in delivery methods let
you choose a format and style appropriate to your
needs.
Our self-paced eLearning is designed to target a
wide range of students. Our overview courses are
ideal foundation builders for design engineers,
as well as executives and managers interested in
an end-to-end view of the network architecture.
For those who desire a greater level of detail on
specific portions of the network, we offer more
advanced courses.

BENEFITS

DELIVERY METHODS

Award Solutions eLearning courses are rich


in technical content. Courses are designed
specifically for the self-paced multimedia learning
environment.

All eLearning courses are available online via our


websites at www.awardsolutions.com or
www.LTEuniversity.com and students receive
immediate access upon purchase.

At the end of each course, 10 review questions


enable students to assess their understanding. The
summary report allows students to quickly review
the content that needs further study. Students also
receive an electronic certificate of completion at
the end of the course.

For large organizations, we offer volume discounts


and site licenses. Our courses are SCORM
compliant and may be easily integrated with a
Learning Management Systems (LMS). The LMS
keeps track of the students progress, and the
results of the course assessment.

eLEARNING COURSES

DURATION

Designed to accommodate a wide variety


of learning styles, our eLearning courses
take full advantage of the multimedia environment.
Each course provides students with full audio,
narrated text and colorful animations to enhance
the learning experience. Review questions in a
variety of formats test the students understanding
for each topic. Many courses also offer an
opportunity to dig deeper into topics. In addition,
every eLearning course allows students to
navigate through the courses according to their
own interests and needs, rather than in a strictly
linear fashion.

Our eLearning courses have varying durations,


ranging from 1 to 4 hours. All courses are divided
into topics that can be completed in 15 minutes
or less. Students may take the training in shorter
segments or in longer blocks to digest all the
information covered at their own pace.
eLearning demos are available on our website at
www.awardsolutions.com.

Welcome to IPv6 eLearning Course

2015 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1. 972.664.0727

Recommended 4G LTE Core EPC and VoLTE Learning Maps


e

[LTE_103] LTE SAE Evolved


Packet Core (EPC) Overview (3 hrs)

Optional eLearning

[LTE_104] Welcome to LTE (1 hr)


[LTE_102] LTE Overview (3 hrs)
[TRND103] Overview of OFDM (2 hrs)
[LTE_101] LTE Essentials (1 day)

[LTE 118] Welcome to VoLTE (1 hr)

[LTE_205] LTE Technology


Overview (2 days)

[LTE 112] VoLTE Overview (1.5 hrs)


[LTE_113] Overview of IPv6 in LTE Networks (3 hrs)

[LTE_305] LTE-EPC Networks


and Signaling (3 days)
Core EPC Track
[LTE_313] LTE-EPC Networks and
Signaling (Architecture, Attach) (2 days)

Instructor Led Training

VoLTE Track
RAN Track

w
cw

[LTE_116] VoLTE
Essentials (1 day)

[LTE_207] Exploring
IMS/VoLTE Networks (2 days)

[LTE_203] VoLTE and IMS in


LTE-EPC Networks (3 days)

[LTE_427] VoLTE Signaling


and Operations (3 days)

2015 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727

Self-paced eLearning

Hands-On Workshops
Certification Workshops

Recommended 4G LTE RAN Learning Maps


e

[LTE_102] LTE Overview (3 hrs)


[LTE_101] LTE Essentials (1 day)
[LTE_205] LTE Technology
Overview (2 days)

[TRND206] Small Cell


Technical Overview (2 days)

[TRND205] DAS Technical


Overview (2 days)

Optional eLearning

[LTE_104] Welcome to LTE (1 hr)


[TRND103] Overview of OFDM (2 hrs)
[TRND104] Multiple Antenna Techniques (3 hrs)

[LTE_301] Mastering LTE Air Interface (2 days)


[LTE_114] LTE-Advanced
Essentials (1 day)

[LTE_309] Mastering TD-LTE


Air Interface (2 days)
[LTE_302] LTE Protocols
and Signaling (3 days)

[LTE 111] LTE Air Interface Signaling Overview (3 hrs)


[LTE_310] LTE-Advanced
Technical Overview (2 days)

[LTE_424] SON: Self Organizing Network


Features in LTE and LTE-Advanced (1.5 days)

[LTE_117] eMBMS
Overview (1 hr)

[LTE_425] eMBMS Protocols


and Signaling (2 days)

[TRND106] Small Cell Overview (1 hr)

Core EPC Track

Instructor Led Training

VoLTE Track
RAN Track

[LTE_405] LTE RAN Signaling and


Operations Certification (5 days)

Self-paced eLearning

w
cw

Hands-On Workshops
Certification Workshops

cw
[LTE_419] LTE RAN Signaling
[LTE_418] LTE RAN Signaling
[LTE_420] LTE RAN Signaling
and Operations: Part 1 (1.5 days) and Operations: Part 2 (1.5 days) and Operations: Part 3 (1.5 days)

[LTE_115]LTE RAN
Performance Essentials (2 days)

[LTE_412] LTE RF
Optimization Workshop (5 days)

w
[LTE_421] LTE RF
Optimization: Part 1 (1.5 days)

[LTE_408] LTE RAN


Capacity Planning
w Workshop (3 days)
[LTE_415] RF Design Workshop:
Part 1 LTE (2 days)

[LTE_422] LTE RF
Optimization: Part 2 (1.5 days)

[LTE_423] LTE RF
Optimization: Part 3 (1.5 days)

[LTE_416] RF Design Workshop:


Part 2 VoLTE and Small Cells (2 days)

w
[LTE_401] LTE RF Planning and Design
Certification Workshop (5 days)

cw

[LTE_208] Small Cell RF


Planning Workshop (2 days)

w
[LTE_413] Small Cells and VoLTE RF Planning
and Design Certification Workshop (4 days)

cwAward Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727


2015

Recommended IP Convergence & IMS Learning Maps


e

[IPC_114] IP Basics (1 hr)

[IPC_113] IP Routing (1 hr)

[IPC_119] Ethernet Basics (1 hr)

Optional eLearning

[IPC_103] Welcome to IP Networking (3 hrs)


[IPC_104] IP Convergence Overview (4 hrs)
[IPC_106] Overview of MPLS (3.5 hrs)
[IPC_107] Overview of IMS (2.5 hr)
[IPC_108] Voice and Video over IP (VoIP) Overview (3 hrs)
[IPC_109] IP Quality of Service (QoS) (3 hrs)

[IPC_118] Ethernet VLANs (1 hr)

[IPC_120] Interconnecting in IP Networks (1 hr)

[IPC_110] Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) (2 hrs)


[IPC_115] QoS in IP Networks (1 hr)
[IPC_116] Ethernet Bridging (1 hr)
[IPC_122] Ethernet Backhaul Overview (3 hrs)

[IPC_117] TCP and Transport Layer Protocols (1 hr)

[IPC_121] Welcome to IPv6 (1 hr)

[IPC_211] Exploring TCP/IP


Protocols (2 days)

[IPC_202] Exploring
IPv6 (1 day)

[IPC_203] Exploring
MPLS (2 days)

[IPC_207] Exploring IP Routing


and Ethernet Bridging (2 days)

Foundational
Track

Instructor Led Training

Technical Track

[IPC_405] IP Networking
Workshop for LTE (4 days)

[IPC_407] IP Routing
and Ethernet Bridging
Workshop (4 days)

[IPC_409] IPv6 Networking


Workshop for LTE
Networks (3 days)

[IPC_406] IP Networking Workshop


for 4G Backhaul (4 days)

2015 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727

Self-paced eLearning

cw

Hands-On Workshops
Certification Workshops

Recommended Network Transformation Learning Maps


[NWTF705] Mobile CSP Network Architecture and Operations (1 day)

[NWTF101] Welcome to SDN (1 hr)

[NWTF204] Exploring Network Transformation with Cloud, SDN, NFV, API, and Big Data (2 days)
[NWTF105] SDN
Overview (1 hr)

[NWTF102] Welcome to Virutalization (1 hr)


[NWTF103] Welcome to Mobile CSP Network Transformation (1 hr)

SDN Essentials
(1 day)

Optional eLearning

[NWTF704] Exploring SoftwareDefined Networking (SDN) for


Network Operators (2 days)

[NWTF402] Software-Defined
Networking (SDN) Hands-On
Workshop (3 days)

Software-Defined Networking
(SDN) Troubleshooting
Workshop (2 days)

w
[NWTF106] NFV
Overview (1 hr)

e
[NWTF203] Exploring Network
Functions Virtualization (NFV) (2 days)

NFV Application Troubleshooting


Workshop (3 days)

[NWTF107] OpenStack
Overview (1 hr)

NFV Application Planning


and Design Workshop (3 days)

OpenStack IaaS Cloud


Essentials (1 day)

e
[NWTF401] OpenStack Cloud
Hands-On Workshop (4 days)

Architecting and Building


OpenStack IaaS (Basic) (3 days)

w
[NWTF108] API
Overview (1 hr)

[NWTF110] API
Essentials (1 day)

e
[NWTF109] Big Data
Overview ( 1 hr)

[NWTF103] Big Data


Essentials (1 day)

Technology
Overview Track

Instructor Led Training

Technical Track

w
cw
2015 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1. 972.664.0727

Self-paced eLearning

Hands-On Workshops
Certification Workshops

2015 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727

4G LTE
Our 4G LTE curriculum offers a wide variety of solutions to meet every need: from high-level overviews for executives and new hires seeking to understand
essential concepts, to in-depth walk-throughs of critical protocols and architectures for designers and support personnel requiring a detailed understanding of
LTE technology, to hands-on workshops for engineers and technicians wanting to improve their analytical skills. The breadth of LTE topics covered in Awards
courses is equally diverse, including air interface, the RAN and EPC network architectures, LTE-Advanced enhancements, Self-Organizing Networks (SON),
IMS and VoLTE operations, RAN troubleshooting and optimization techniques, RF design, and network planning. The curriculum is appropriate for those with
backgrounds in GSM/UMTS or 1x/1xEV-DO technologies, as well as those who are new to the wireless industry.

SELF-PACED eLEARNING COURSES

[LTE_109] Welcome to LTE (e)


[LTE_102] LTE Overview (e)
[LTE_103] LTE SAE Evolved Packet Core (EPC) Overview (e)
[LTE_111] LTE Air Interface Signaling Overview (e)
[LTE_113] Overview of IPv6 for LTE Networks (e)
*[LTE_117] eMBMS Overview (e) *NEW
*[LTE_118] Welcome to VoLTE (e) *NEW
[LTE_112] VoLTE Overview (e)
[TRND103] Overview of OFDM (e)
[TRND104] Multiple Antenna Techniques (e)
*[TRND104] Small Cell Overview (e) *NEW

INSTRUCTOR LED COURSES

[LTE_101] LTE Essentials


[LTE_205] LTE Technology Overview
[LTE_114] LTE-Advanced Essentials
[LTE_310] LTE-Advanced Technical Overview
[LTE_301] Mastering LTE Air Interface
[LTE_309] Mastering TD-LTE Air Interface
[LTE_302] LTE Protocols and Signaling
[LTE_305] LTE-EPC Networks and Signaling
*[LTE_313] LTE-EPC Networks and Signaling (Architecture, Attach) *NEW
*[LTE_425] eMBMS Protocols and Signaling *NEW

*[LTE_424] SON: Self-Organizing Network Features in LTE and LTE-Advanced *NEW

[LTE_116] VoLTE Essentials


[LTE_207] Exploring IMS/VoLTE Networks
[LTE_203] VoLTE and IMS in LTE-EPC Networks
*[LTE_427] VoLTE Signaling and Operations *NEW
[LTE_115] LTE RAN Performance Essentials
[LTE_401] LTE RF Planning and Design Certification Workshop
[LTE_408] LTE RAN Capacity Planning Certification Workshop
[LTE_405] LTE RAN Signaling and Operations Certification
*[LTE_418] LTE RAN Signaling and Operations: Part 1 - Attach *NEW

*[LTE_419] LTE RAN Signaling and Operations: Part 2 - Mobility, QoS, Traffic *NEW
*[LTE_420] LTE RAN Signaling and Operations: Part 3 - Interworking (GSM/UMTS) *NEW

*[LTE_415] RF Design Workshop: Part 1 - LTE *NEW

LTE Technology Overview Instructor Led Course

INSTRUCTOR LED COURSES (continued)

*[LTE_416] RF Design Workshop: Part 2 - VoLTE and Small Cells *NEW


[LTE_412] LTE RF Optimization Certification Workshop (UE Based)
*[LTE_421] LTE RF Optimization: Part 1 - Coverage and Accessibility *NEW
*[LTE_422] LTE RF Optimization: Part 2 - Downlink and Uplink Throughput *NEW
*[LTE_423] LTE RF Optimization: Part 3 - Mobility and Inter-RAT *NEW
[TRND206] Small Cells Technical Overview
*[LTE_208] Small Cells RF Planning Workshop *NEW
[LTE_413] Small Cells and VoLTE RF Planning and Design Certification Workshop
[TRND205] DAS Technical Overview

2015 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727

Welcome to LTE

eLearning | Average Duration: 1 hour | Course Number: LTE_109


Long Term Evolution (LTE) is one of the choices for next generation broadband wireless networks and is defined by the 3GPP standards as an evolution to a
variety of 3G wireless networks, including both UMTS and 1xEV-DO; its high data rates enable a wide range of advanced multimedia applications. This
eLearning course offers a quick, high-level overview of LTE radio and Evolved Packet Core (EPC) networks. The key characteristics of the LTE air interface,
access network and core network are defined, along with a review of the capabilities of the LTE user equipment (UE). The services expected to be supported
on LTE networks are summarized, with special emphasis on voice solutions. Finally, important considerations for deploying LTE networks are laid out, including
the ability to interwork with existing 3G networks.

Knowledge Knuggets

Intended Audience
This course is an end-to-end overview of LTE networks, and is targeted for
a broad audience. This includes those in sales, marketing, deployment,
operations, and support groups.

1. Motivations for 4G

Learning Objectives

2. LTE Network Architecture

After completing this course, the student will be able to:


Identify the motivations and goals for 4G networks
Summarize the basic concepts of LTE Air Interface
Sketch the high-level architectures of the evolved LTE Radio
network (E-UTRAN) and Evolved Packet Core (EPC)
Describe the different categories of LTE UE
Walk through a typical LTE call from power-up to service setup to
disconnect
Define the key services expected on LTE networks
Illustrate the interworking solutions for GSM/UMTS and 1x/1xEV-DO
networks
Explain the important factors to consider when deploying LTE
networks

1.1. 3G limitations
1.2. LTE goals and targets
1.3. 4G building blocks
2.1. LTE architecture goals
2.2. LTE network components
2.2.1. Evolved UTRAN (E-UTRAN)
2.2.2. Evolved Packet Core (EPC)

3. LTE Devices
3.1. Device categories
3.2. Role of SIM card

4. LTE Air Interface


4.1.
4.2.
4.3.
4.4.

Scalable bandwidth
Supported radio bands
OFDM/OFDMA concepts
Multiple antennas in LTE

5. LTE Services
5.1.
5.2.
5.3.
5.4.
5.5.

Typical call setup sequence


Basic and enhanced services
Voice and SMS solutions
IP Multimedia Subsystem (IMS)
Policy and Charging Control (PCC)

6. LTE Deployment
6.1.
6.2.
6.3.
6.4.

10

Interworking with GSM/UMTS


Interworking with 1x/1xEV-DO
Deployment considerations
Backhaul options

2015 Award
AwardSolutions,
Solutions,Inc.
Inc. www.awardsolutions.com
www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727
+1.972.664.0727
2015

v2.0

LTE Overview

eLearning | Average Duration: 3 hours | Course Number: LTE_102


Long Term Evolution (LTE) is one of the choices for next generation broadband wireless networks and is defined by the 3GPP standards as an evolution to a
variety of 3G wireless networks such as UMTS and 1xEV-DO. Its high data rates enable advanced multimedia applications. This eLearning course offers a
quick and concise overview of LTE networks and the OFDM-based air interface. The LTE network architecture, network interfaces and protocols, air interface
and mobility aspects are covered to provide an end-to-end view of the network. A high-level glimpse into the life of an LTE User Equipment (UE) is provided by
walking through various stages from power-up all the way to setting up an IP address and exchanging traffic. By the conclusion of this course, the student will
understand what LTE offers, its network architecture, how it works, and potential applications and services.

Intended Audience

Knowledge Knuggets

This course is an end-to-end overview of LTE networks, and is targeted for


a broad audience. This includes those in design, test, sales, marketing,
system engineering and deployment groups.

Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to:
Describe the state of wireless networks and trends for next
generation wireless networks
Sketch the System Architecture Evolution (SAE) for LTE and its
interfaces
Describe OFDM concepts and how it is used in LTE
Define the key features of the LTE air interface
Walk through the mobile device operations from power-up to service
setup
Explain how uplink and downlink traffic are handled in LTE networks
Walk through a high level service flow setup on an end-to-end basis
Explain deployment scenarios of LTE networks

1. Setting the stage


1.1. Transition options to LTE
1.2. Trends for next generation wireless
networks
1.3. LTE network changes
1.4. LTE Air interface changes

2. LTE Network Architecture


2.1.
2.2.
2.3.
2.4.
2.5.

System Architecture Evolution (SAE)


Network architecture and interfaces
SAE nodes and functions
E-UTRAN - eNodeB
Protocol stacks for network interfaces

7. Deployment
7.1. Typical LTE deployment scenarios

8. Summary
Put It All Together
Assess the knowledge of the participant
based on the objectives of the course

3. LTE air interface


3.1. Shared radio channel concepts
3.2. OFDM/OFDMA, SOFDMA SC-FDMA
concepts
3.3. Protocol stack
3.4. Air interface channel structure
3.5. Channel characteristics

4. LTE UE operations
4.1.
4.2.
4.3.
4.4.

System acquisition
Synchronization
Initial access procedures
Data service setup

5. LTE Traffic handling


5.1. Downlink traffic handling
5.2. Uplink traffic handling

6. LTE Mobility
6.1. Cell selection/reselection
6.2. Handover
2015 Award
AwardSolutions,
Solutions,Inc.
Inc. www.awardsolutions.com
www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727
+1.972.664.0727
2015

v5.0

11

LTE SAE Evolved Packet Core (EPC) Overview


eLearning | Average Duration: 3 hours | Course Number: LTE_103

A cellular network consists of a radio network, one or more core networks, and a services network. The LTE Evolved Packet Core (EPC) is the next-generation
core network that is expected to replace the existing/legacy core networks. A typical 3G core network consists of a Circuit Switched Core Network (CS-CN) and
a Packet Switched Core Network (PS-CN). The EPC is an all-IP packet-switched core network that can connect to a variety of radio networks such as the LTEbased E-UTRAN, WCDMA-based UTRAN, GERAN, CDMA2000 1x, 1xEV-DO/HRPD, and WiMAX. The EPC is formally defined by 3GPP as part of the Evolved
Packet System (EPS) that uses an LTE-based EUTRAN. This eLearning course provides an overview of the EPC, including the architecture, basic functions, its
role in session setup, and its support for inter-technology mobility.

Knowledge Knuggets

Intended Audience
This course is intended for those seeking a fundamental understanding of
how EPC works in the next-generation cellular network. This includes those
in a design, test, systems engineering, sales engineering, network
engineering, or verification role.

Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to:
Summarize key benefits and challenges of the EPC
Specify roles of various EPC components
Explain the functions (e.g., authentication and security) performed
by the EPC
Describe a high-level session setup using the EPC
Discuss how EPC supports inter-technology handover

Suggested Prerequisites
Welcome to IP Networking (eLearning)

Complementary Courses
LTE Overview (eLearning)

1. Introduction to LTE EPC


1.1.
1.2.
1.3.
1.4.
1.5.
1.6.

Overall cellular system architecture


Motivation for the EPC
Influence of IP convergence
EPC as part of EPS
Role of IMS
Services (VoIP, Web-browsing, and
video streaming) in EPC

5. Seamless Inter-technology
Handover via EPC
5.1. EPC architecture for seamless
mobility
5.2. EPC features in support of
mobility
5.3. Handover scenarios (LTE-UMTS,
LTE-GSM and LTE-1xEV-DO)

2. EPC Architecture
2.1. Core network requirements
2.2. Legacy core networks
2.3. Elements of the EPC (e.g., HSS,
MME, S-GW, and P-GW) and
interfaces

6. Summary
Put It All Together
Assess the knowledge of the participant
based on the objectives of the course

3. Major Functions of the EPC


3.1.
3.2.
3.3.
3.4.
3.5.

Authentication and security


Policy charging and control and QoS
Packet routing
Mobility management
IP address allocation

4. Session Setup using EPC


4.1. Overall call flow
4.2. Interaction between the E-UTRAN
and EPC

12

2015 Award
AwardSolutions,
Solutions,Inc.
Inc. www.awardsolutions.com
www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727
+1.972.664.0727
2015

v3.0

LTE Air Interface Signaling Overview


eLearning | Duration: 3 hours | Course Number: LTE_111

Long Term Evolution (LTE) is a leading contender for next generation broadband wireless networks, providing an evolution path for a variety of 3G wireless
networks, such as UMTS and 1xEV-DO. LTE offers significantly higher packet data rates, enabling advanced multimedia applications and high-speed Internet
access. This eLearning course takes a look at the LTE air interface and Non-Access Stratum (NAS) signaling operations used to establish and maintain LTE
calls. The key LTE network components and interfaces are described, and then the steps involved in establishing and managing data calls are illustrated,
highlighting the roles of each component and the flow of signaling and data across the network. By the conclusion of this course, the student will have a
deeper understanding of how the UE and the network work together to deliver services to LTE subscribers.

Intended Audience

Knowledge Knuggets

This course provides an overview of LTE signaling operations, and is


targeted for a broad audience for a quick reference to LTE operations. This
includes those in engineering, operations, and product sales/marketing.

After completing this course, the student will be able to:


Sketch the key components of a typical LTE network and the
interfaces between them
List the key channels of DL and UL in LTE
Provide an overview of Call setup and related signaling in LTE
Walk through the steps involved in a Network Attach
Discuss the establishment of EPS bearers
Explain how QoS requirements are managed in LTE
Summarize the cell selection and reselection processes for idle UEs
Illustrate how active connections are maintained during handovers

LTE Overview (eLearning)

1.1. E-UTRAN architecture


1.2. EPC (MME, S-GW, P-GW, HSS)

2. LTE Air Interface Signaling Basics

Learning Objectives

Suggested Prerequisites

1. LTE Network Architecture Overview

2.1. LTE frame structure


2.2. LTE channels overview

3. System Acquisition
3.1.
3.2.
3.3.
3.4.

Initial attach operation


Default/dedicated bearer setup
Handovers and idle mobility
Inter-RAT handovers

4. Network Attachment and Default


Bearer
4.1. Attachment steps
4.2. Default bearer setup
4.3. IP address allocation

7. Idle Mode
7.1.
7.2.
7.3.
7.4.

S1 release
Cell reselection
TAU
Paging

8. Handover
8.1. Handover types
8.2. Measurement
8.3. Handover stages

9. Summary
Put It All Together
Assess the knowledge of the participant
based on the objectives of the course

5. QoS and Dedicated Bearers


5.1. QoS classes
5.2. QoS enforcement
5.3. Dedicated EPS bearers

6. Uplink and Downlink Traffic


6.1.
6.2.
6.3.
6.4.

CQI
DC1
Downlink traffic operations
Uplink traffic operations

2015 Award
AwardSolutions,
Solutions,Inc.
Inc. www.awardsolutions.com
www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727
+1.972.664.0727
2015

v1.0

13

Overview of IPv6 in LTE Networks

eLearning | Average Duration: 3 hours | Course Number: LTE_113


Long Term Evolution (LTE) is universally accepted as the next generation broadband wireless system based on an All-IP network. Each LTE device would need
at least one IP address to communicate and obtain services like web browsing, machine-to-machine communication, voice and video services, SMS, etc. As
the number of IP connected nodes continue to grow, the current IPv4-NAT architecture no longer suffices and we must consider a transition to IPv6 protocol.
This eLearning course explores the IPv6 protocol, its features and capabilities and describes how LTE networks assign IPv6 addresses to LTE devices. It
describes IPv6 address format, assignment of IPv6 address to LTE devices, dual-stack IPv4v6 addressing to facilitate smooth transition, and IPv4-IPv6
interworking. In conclusion, the student will understand the use of IPv6 addresses and IPv6 operations in LTE networks.

Intended Audience

Knowledge Knuggets

This course is an overview of IPv6 addressing formats and IPv6


assignment operation in LTE networks, and is targeted for a broad
audience. This includes those in planning, provisioning, operations, and
end-to-end service deployment groups.

1.1. LTE-EPC network architecture


1.2. PDN connections
1.3. IP address assignment in LTE

2. IPv4 in Wireless Networks

Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to:

1. Setting the Stage

Sketch LTE-EPC network architecture and identify the role of IPv6


Analyze the limitations of IPv4 addresses
List the key aspects of IPv6
Sketch the IPv6 addressing architecture and addressing formats
Discuss different UE IP address allocation schemes in LTE
Describe the use of dual stack IPv4/IPv6 in LTE Networks
Describe some IPv4 and IPv6 interworking scenarios
Explain IPv6 address assignment scenarios of LTE networks

2.1.
2.2.
2.3.
2.4.

IPv4 address formats


Use of public and private addresses
Mobility support GTP and mobile IP
Limitations of IPv4

3. IPv6 Essentials
3.1. Key aspects of IPv6
3.2. Ipv6 header description
3.3. IPv6 addressing

4. IPv6 Assignment in LTE Networks


4.1.
4.2.
4.3.
4.4.

Default bearer setup operation


IPv6 address allocation
Role of NAS signaling
Assignment of dual-stack IPv4/IPv6
addresses

5. IPv4/IPv6 Transition Mechanisms


5.1. Dual stack addressing
5.2. Tunnels
5.3. Translators

6. IPv6 Deployment in LTE Networks


6.1. Dual-stack connectivity
6.2. IPv6 migration scenarios

Put It All Together


Assess the knowledge of the participant
based on the objectives of the course
14

2015 Award
AwardSolutions,
Solutions,Inc.
Inc. www.awardsolutions.com
www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727
+1.972.664.0727
2015

v1.0

eMBMS Overview

eLearning (H5) | Average Duration: 1 hour | Course Number: LTE_117


Mobile operators around the world are deploying Long Term Evolution (LTE) in order to support the ever increasing demand for speed and data throughput.
Video is becoming a significant component of the information carried by mobile networks. Techniques related to content distribution are critical for the
operators to maximize the spectral efficiencies and provide acceptable coverage and capacity for subscribers. eMBMS (evolved Multimedia Broadcast
Multicast Services) is a technology designed for LTE networks that supports efficient distribution of broadcast and multicast contents. This course provides an
overview of eMBMS technology. Starting with a quick introduction to eMBMS, the course then describes example usage scenarios followed by an architecture
discussion. The course covers the end-to-end operations in eMBMS and concludes with a look at how eMBMS is supported over the air on LTE networks.

Knowledge Knuggets

Intended Audience
This course is an overview of eMBMS and is targeted for a broad audience.
This audience includes those in product management, planning,
Integration, operations, and end-to-end service deployment groups.

Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to:

Describe what eMBMS technology is


Sketch the architecture of the eMBMS network
Mention functions of network interfaces in an eMBMS network
Identify signaling and traffic paths within the eMBMS network
Explain the concept of MBSFN
Specify example MBMS development features in various releases of
3GPP
Describe possible eMBMS deployment scenarios

Suggested Prerequisites
LTE Overview (eLearning)

1. Introduction

1.1. What is eMBMS?


1.2. eMBMS transmission modes
1.3. eMBMS usage

2. eMBMS Architecture
2.1.
2.2.
2.3.
2.4.

6. Summary
Put It All Together
Assess the knowledge of the participant
based on the objectives of the course

3-layer functional model


Functional architecture and nodes
Network interfaces
Traffic and signaling paths

3. eMBMS Operations
3.1. Broadcast and multicast operations
3.2. Session control procedures
3.3. Traffic transmission and reception
scenarios

4. eMBMS Air Interface


4.1. MBSFN and service areas
4.2. Resource allocation options
4.3. Standards and development

5. Deployment Scenarios
5.1. Event driven deployment scenario
5.2. Content dependent deployment
scenario

2015 Award
AwardSolutions,
Solutions,Inc.
Inc. www.awardsolutions.com
www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727
+1.972.664.0727
2015

v1.0

15

Welcome to VoLTE

eLearning (H5) | Average Duration: 1 hour | Course Number: LTE_118


The LTE Evolved Packet Core (EPC) is an evolution of the 3GPP system architecture with the vision of an all-IP network finally realized. EPC in conjunction with
IP Multimedia Subsystem (IMS) delivers various services such as VoIP, SMS, Video call, Picture share, IM and Presence. EPC and IMS support interworking
with the existing 2G/3G wireless networks as well as PSTN to facilitate smooth migration, seamless mobility and service continuity across these networks. This
eLearning module provides an overview of supporting voice services using LTE, which is known as Voice over LTE (VoLTE). The module discusses the LTE-EPC,
IMS, and the PCC as the building blocks for VoLTE. The pre-call operations such as connectivity with the IMS network and IMS registration are explained, along
with the VoLTE call setup and configuration. Interworking between LTE and PSTN is also discussed.

Knowledge Knuggets

Intended Audience
This course is an overview of Voice over LTE, and is targeted for a broad
audience. This audience includes those in planning, Integration,
operations, and end-to-end service deployment groups.

Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to:
Describe how voice services will function in LTE networks using
VoLTE
Describe the role of the LTE-Evolved packet core, Policy & Charging
Control and IP Multimedia System (IMS) in LTE networks
Specify the role of key IMS and Policy nodes and how those nodes
interact to deliver an end-to-end VoLTE call
Summarize the main steps of pre-call operations including default
bearer establishment and IMS registration
Summarize main steps of pre-call operations such as IMS
registration
Describe the main steps of setting up a VoLTE call
Identify the protocols used within the LTE and IMS networks for
VoLTE

Suggested Prerequisites
LTE Overview (eLearning)
Overview of IMS (eLearning)

16

1. Course Objectives
2. What is VoLTE?
2.1. Voice in mobile networks
2.2. VoLTE

3. LTE and IMS


3.1.
3.2.
3.3.
3.4.
3.5.
3.6.
3.7.
3.8.

LTE network overview


LTE-EPC
Overview of IMS elements
Overview of IMS elements CSCF
EPS bearers for VoLTE
Pre-requisites for VoLTE calling
IMS registration
Protocols used for VoLTE

5. Summary
5.1.
5.2.
5.3.
5.4.
5.5.

LTE
IMS and policy
Supporting SMS in LTE
VoLTE call setup
Signaling and media

6. Final Assessment
Assess the knowledge of the participant
based on the objectives of the course

4. VoLTE Call Establishment


4.1. Overview
4.2. SIP invite routing
4.3. Routing the SIP INVITE
4.4. SIP INVITE to destination mobile
4.5. Media negotiation
4.6. Resource reservation
4.7. Dedicated bearer creation
4.8. Signaling and media flow
4.9. Ending the call
4.10. VoLTE interworking with PSTN

2015 Award
AwardSolutions,
Solutions,Inc.
Inc. www.awardsolutions.com
www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727
+1.972.664.0727
2015

v1.0

VoLTE Overview

eLearning | Average Duration: 1.5 hours | Course Number: LTE_112


The LTE Evolved Packet Core (EPC) is an evolution of the 3GPP system architecture with the vision of an all-IP network finally realized. EPC in conjunction with
IP Multimedia Subsystem (IMS) delivers various services such as VoIP, SMS, Video call, Picture share, IM and Presence. EPC and IMS support interworking
with the existing 2G/3G wireless networks as well as PSTN to facilitate smooth migration, seamless mobility and service continuity across these networks. This
eLearning module provides an overview of supporting voice services using LTE, which is known as Voice over LTE (VoLTE). LTE-EPC, IMS, and the PCC are
discussed as the building blocks for VoLTE. The pre-call operations such as connectivity with the IMS network and IMS registration are explained along with
VoLTE call setup and configuration. Interworking between LTE and PSTN is discussed. Basic means of supporting SMS in LTE are also summarized.

Knowledge Knuggets

Intended Audience
This course is an overview of Voice over LTE, and is targeted for a broad
audience. This audience includes those in planning, Integration,
operations, and end-to-end service deployment groups.

Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to:

List various solutions for delivering voice in LTE networks.


Describe the role of LTE-EPC, PCC, and IMS in VoLTE.
Specify the roles of key IMS and PCC nodes.
Sketch inter-connectivity of LTE-EPC, IMS, and PCC nodes to deliver
an end-to-end IMS call.
Summarize main steps of pre-call operations such as IMS
registration.
Describe the main steps of setting up a VoLTE call.
Specify how SMS can be supported in LTE.

Suggested Prerequisites
LTE Overview (eLearning)
Overview of IMS (eLearning)

1. Overview of EPS

1.1. Supporting voice services in LTE


1.2. Overall network architecture (EPS,
IMS, PCC)
1.3. Initial attach
1.4. Default vs. dedicated EPS bearers
1.5. Connectivity with IMS APN

2. Connectivity Among EPS, IMS, and


PCC
2.1.
2.2.
2.3.
2.4.

Overview of IMS elements


Overview of PCC elements
QoS model in LTE
Connectivity of IMS, LTE-EPC & PCC

5. VoLTE-Scenarios
5.1. LTE-PSTN interworking and role of
IMS
5.2. Overview of Single Radio Voice
Call Continuity (SRVCC)
5.3. Supporting SMS in LTE

6. Summary
Put It All Together
Assess the knowledge of the participant
based on the objectives of the course

3. Pre-Call IMS Functions for VoLTE


3.1. PDN connection to IMS
3.2. P-CSCF discovery
3.3. IMS registration

4. VoLTE Call Setup


4.1. Overall steps for an all-IP call
4.2. PCC-IMS interactions
4.3. Dedicated bearer setup

2015 Award
AwardSolutions,
Solutions,Inc.
Inc. www.awardsolutions.com
www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727
+1.972.664.0727
2015

v2.0

17

Overview of OFDM

eLearning | Average Duration: 2 hours | Course Number: TRND103


Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing (OFDM) is a transmission technique used to achieve very high data rates. OFDM is the technology of choice for all
major wireless systems including Wireless LAN 802.11, WiMAX 802.16, digital audio/video broadcast systems such as Digital Video Broadcast Handheld
(DVB-H), Media FLO, and the air interface evolution of 3G Wireless systems based on 3GPP and 3GPP2. OFDM facilitates higher data rates over a wireless
medium, which is very exciting to wireless operators who are eager to deploy multimedia rich Internet content over a wireless medium with seamless access
anywhere, anytime. This course describes key OFDM concepts and terminology. It explains the challenges of radio propagation and describes how OFDM
overcomes these challenges to offer high data rates in a spectrally efficient manner, and steps through the key OFDM operations in an end-to-end transmission.

Knowledge Knuggets

Intended Audience
This is a technical course, primarily intended for those in system design,
system integration and test, systems engineering, network engineering,
operations, and support.

Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to:
Walk through the evolution of radio technologies
Describe the evolution and applications of OFDM
List the key attributes of OFDM and understand the frequency
domain orthogonality
Define various terms used in OFDM-based systems
Describe the challenges of radio propagation and how OFDM
overcome these challenges
Describe the key operation of cyclic prefix, FFT and IFFT
List the basic transmitter and receiver components in an OFDM
system
Step through the typical operations of an end-to-end data
transmission in an OFDM-based system

1. Introduction
1.1. Evolution of radio technologies
1.2. Concepts of FDMA, TDMA, CDMA
1.3. Need for OFDM for high data rates

6. End-to-End Transmission
6.1. Transmitter and receiver
components
6.2. OFDM operations

2. Principles of OFDM
2.1. Key attributes of OFDM
2.2. Frequency domain orthogonality
2.3. Time and frequency domain views

3. OFDM Basics
3.1.
3.2.
3.3.
3.4.

Carrier and subcarrier


Modulation and OFDM symbol
Subcarrier spacing
Guard period and cyclic prefix

7. Summary
Put It All Together
Assess the knowledge of the participant
based on the objectives of the course

4. Radio Propagation
4.1.
4.2.
4.3.
4.4.
4.5.

Multipath and doppler shift


Inter Symbol Interference (ISI)
Guard Time
Inter Carrier Interference (ICI)
Cyclic prefix and pilots

5. Fourier Transform
5.1. Motivation for using Fourier
Transforms in OFDM systems
5.2. Concept of Fourier Transform
5.3. Discrete Fourier Transform (DFT)
5.4. Fast Fourier Transform (FFT)
5.5. Implementation

18

2015
2015 Award
AwardSolutions,
Solutions,Inc.
Inc. www.awardsolutions.com
www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727
+1.972.664.0727

v3.0

Multiple Antenna Techniques

eLearning | Average Duration: 3 hours | Course Number: TRND104


Advanced multiple antenna technologies enable emerging 4G cellular technologies to achieve superior data rates over the air interface (e.g., in excess of 100
Mbps). While 4G networks utilize an efficient multiple access technique called Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiple Access (OFDMA), OFDMA on its own
cannot deliver the expected superior throughput in 4G systems. Multiple antenna techniques play a critical role in increasing spectral efficiency. This course
provides fundamental knowledge of numerous multiple antenna techniques that will be an integral part of emerging radio access standards. The antenna
basics are explained, along with typical antenna configurations in commercial cellular deployments. Major antenna techniques are covered in the course,
providing a strong foundation for advanced antenna technologies.

Knowledge Knuggets

Intended Audience
This course is intended for those seeking a fundamental understanding of
how various multiple antenna techniques work. This includes those in a
design, test, systems engineering, sales engineering, network engineering,
or verification role.

Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to:
Outline key benefits and challenges of multiple antenna techniques
Provide examples of various types of multiple antenna techniques
Explain transmit and receive diversity techniques such as Space
Time Coding (STC) and antenna grouping
Contrast a switched-beam system with an adaptive beamforming
technique
Describe MIMO spatial multiplexing techniques
Discuss the implementation of SDMA
Give examples of the multiple antenna techniques defined in
emerging 4G cellular networks

Complementary Courses
Overview of OFDM (eLearning)

1. Introduction to Antenna Techniques


1.1. Antenna basics: Transmit and receive
operation, antenna parameters, and
antenna gain characteristics
1.2. Motivation for advanced antenna
techniques
1.3. Example of antenna configurations:
Omni and sectorized systems, 1
transmit and 1 receive antenna, 1
transmit and 2 receive antennas with
space and polarization diversity
1.4. Summary of multiple antenna
techniques, including advantages
and challenges

2. Transmit and Receive Diversity


Techniques
2.1. Basic techniques (space, time, and
frequency)
2.2. Advanced transmit diversity
techniques including STC,
frequency/space, and antenna
grouping/selection
2.3. Receive diversity

4. MIMO - Spatial Multiplexing


4.1. Basics of spatial multiplexing
4.2. Horizontal and vertical encoding,
single-code word and multi-code
word
4.3. MIMO transmitter and receiver
examples
4.4. Closed-loop MIMO (MIMO +
precoding)
4.5. Collaborative spatial multiplexing
4.6. Benefits and challenges of MIMOSM

5. Summary
Put It All Together
Assess the knowledge of the participant
based on the objectives of the course

3. Beamforming Techniques
3.1.
3.2.
3.3.
3.4.
3.5.

Construction of a beam
Transmit and receive beamforming
Switched-beam system
Adaptive beamforming system
Benefits and challenges of
beamforming

2015 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727


+1.972.664.0727

v2.0

19

Small Cell Overview

eLearning (H5) | Duration: 1 hour | Course Number: TRND106


Wireless data traffic has doubled every year for the last several years, and this trend is expected to continue for years to come. In order to cope with this
exponential increase in demand, wireless service providers are augmenting their macro cellular networks with heterogeneous networks (HetNets), deploying
small cell solutions to increase both coverage and capacity for their public, residential and enterprise subscribers. This course provides a high-level overview
of the new HetNet paradigm, highlighting the challenges, opportunities and solutions service providers have with respect to small cells. These include
deployment considerations, network configuration and management requirements, and interactions with macrocell networks, in order to deliver improved
service to the subscribers while at the same time minimizing equipment and operational costs.

Knowledge Knuggets

Intended Audience
This course is intended for those in engineering functions related to small
cells, as well as those who are involved in small cell planning, design, and
deployment.

Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to:
Define small cells and describe their market drivers
Sketch the HetNet architecture and describe the physical and
logical interworking between small cells and macrocells
List the key enabling technologies that optimize small cell
performance and automate network management functions
Identify the key challenges and available solutions for deploying
small cells in outdoor/public locations
Discuss the unique characteristics of indoor/residential/enterprise
small cell deployments

1. Course Objectives
2. Introduction to Small Cells
2.1.
2.2.
2.3.
2.4.
2.5.

Define Small Cells


Operator Challenges
Outdoor Applications
Indoor Applications
Summary

6. Learning More about Small Cells


7. Final Assessment
Assess the knowledge of the participant
based on the objectives of the course

3. Small Cell Network Architecture


3.1.
3.2.
3.3.
3.4.

Heterogeneous Networks
Interworking with Macrocells
Backhaul Solutions
Configuration Management and
Network Security
3.5. Summary

4. Outdoor Applications
4.1.
4.2.
4.3.
4.4.
4.5.

Metro Installation Considerations


Metro Coverage Solutions
Metro Capacity Solutions
Rural Coverage Solutions
Summary

5. Indoor Applications
5.1. Residential and Small/Home Office
Solutions
5.2. Enterprise Solutions
5.3. Multi-Tenant Solutions
5.4. Special Venue Solutions
5.5. Summary

20

2015 Award
AwardSolutions,
Solutions,Inc.
Inc. www.awardsolutions.com
www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727
+1.972.664.0727
2015

v1.0

LTE Essentials

Instructor Led | Duration: 1 Day | Course Number: LTE_101


Long Term Evolution (LTE) is a 4th generation wireless network technology based on OFDM and MIMO. It provides much higher data rates (up to 300 Mbps) to
users while reducing the net cost-per-bit, allowing wireless operators to deploy multimedia-rich Internet content over a wireless medium with seamless access
anywhere at any time. This one day course provides an overview of LTE from both a technology and an application perspective. It gives an overview of the
network architecture, the fundamental radio technologies such as OFDM and multiple antenna techniques, and the basic call setup procedures. The course
discusses how LTE supports essential services such as Voice over LTE (VoLTE), and goes on to explore the key deployment considerations for LTE network. The
course wraps up with a brief summary of the enhancements offered by the next step in LTE technology, LTE-Advanced.

Intended Audience

Course Outline

This course is intended for those in business non-engineering and


technology functions who need to understand LTE, its key characteristics
and its important capabilities.

Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to:
Identify the key goals and requirements of LTE
Sketch the EUTRAN and EPC network architectures and explain the
roles of the important nodes and interfaces
Describe the key technical enhancements introduced in the LTE air
interface and discuss how they contribute to higher capacity and
performance
List the steps involved in setting up and managing a typical LTE data
session
Explain the roles of LTE and IMS in delivering realtime services like
VoLTE to subscribers
Discuss the important considerations when planning and deploying
LTE networks

Suggested Prerequisites

1. LTE Overview
1.1. Motivations for 4G
1.2. LTE design goals and requirements
1.3. LTE strengths and challenges

2. LTE Network Architecture


2.1. EUTRAN network architecture
2.2. EPC network architecture
2.3. Network nodes and interfaces

3. LTE Air Interface


3.1.
3.2.
3.3.
3.4.

Key air interface technologies


Multiple antenna techniques
LTE frame structure
Overview of DL/UL channels

4. Life of an LTE Mobile


4.1.
4.2.
4.3.
4.4.
4.5.

5. LTE Services
5.1. QoS support in LTE
5.2. PCC and IMS service networks
5.3. Voice over LTE (VoLTE)

6. LTE Deployment
6.1.
6.2.
6.3.
6.4.
6.5.

Multi-frequency deployment
3G and LTE interactions
Multiple antenna considerations
Backhaul considerations
LTE performance targets

Appendix A: LTE-Advanced
A.1 Carrier aggregation
A.2 SON and HetNet
A.3 Architecture enhancements

System acquisition
Registration and call setup
Data transmission in DL and UL
Idle mode operations
Mobility and handover

LTE Overview (eLearning)

2015 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com


www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727
+1.972.664.0727

v1.11

21

LTE Technology Overview

Instructor Led | Duration: 2 Days | Course Number: LTE_205


Long Term Evolution (LTE) is a radio technology based on OFDM and MIMO technologies. LTE provides much higher data rates (over 100 Mbps) to users while
reducing the cost-per-bit for service providers. This is very exciting to wireless operators who are eager to deploy multimedia rich Internet content over a
wireless medium with seamless access anywhere at any time. This course describes the simplified architecture of LTE and moves on to OFDM and MIMO. The
course also covers the downlink and uplink frame structure, OFDM operations at the physical layer, and resource management and scheduling considerations
at the MAC layer. It steps through system acquisition, call setup, traffic operations and handover. The deployment and interworking issues with 2G/3G wireless
networks are also explored. In summary, this course provides a comprehensive overview of LTE technology.

Course Outline

Intended Audience
This course provides a comprehensive overview and a technical
introduction to LTE. It is suitable for engineers in network planning and
design, product design and development, network deployment, network
performance, and network operations.

1. Introduction

Learning Objectives

2. LTE Architecture and Protocols

After completing this course, the student will be able to:


List the requirements and capabilities of LTE
Explain the network architecture of E-UTRAN and EPC
Sketch the architecture of security, policy and charging control
(PCC), and IP Multimedia Subsystem (IMS) and their interactions
with EPC
Describe the use of OFDM and multiple antenna techniques in LTE
Describe the key concepts in the LTE air interface
List steps for network acquisition and EPS bearer setup
Describe the traffic operation in DL and UL
List mobility and handover procedures
Describe various ways to support voice and SMS services in LTE
networks
Explain LTE interworking with 2G/3G wireless networks
Identify the planning aspects of deploying an LTE network

Suggested Prerequisites
LTE Overview (eLearning)

22

1.1. 4G technology and market drivers


1.2. Goals and requirements of LTE
1.3. LTE building blocks
2.1. E-UTRAN and EPC
2.2. Roles of eNB, MME, S-GW, P-GW,
and HSS
2.3. Key interfaces: S1, X2, S6a, S5, and
S11
2.4. Role of IMS in LTE networks
2.5. Evolution path from current networks
2.6. UE categories

3. LTE Air Interface


3.1.
3.2.
3.3.
3.4.

Orthogonality
Use of OFDM in LTE
MIMO (SU-MIMO, MU-MIMO)
LTE air interface channels

4. Initial Attach
4.1.
4.2.
4.3.
4.4.
4.5.
4.6.
4.7.

System acquisition
Random access procedures
RRC connection
Initial attach
Authentication and security
Default bearer setup
IP address allocation

2015Award
Award
Solutions,
Inc.www.awardsolutions.com
www.awardsolutions.com+1.972.664.0727
+1.972.664.0727
2015
Solutions,
Inc.

5. QoS Support in LTE


5.1.
5.2.
5.3.
5.4.
5.5.

PCC framework
EPS bearers and SDFs
Dedicated bearer setup
QoS in LTE
Traffic operations in DL and UL

6. Idle Mode Mobility and Handover


6.1.
6.2.
6.3.
6.4.

Idle mode operations


Cell reselection
Tracking area update
X2 handover

7. Services in LTE
7.1. Voice support in LTE: CS-Fallback,
VoLTE, and SR-VCC
7.2. Support for SMS

8. Interworking and Deployment


8.1. Interworking with 2G/3G wireless
networks
8.2. Deployment considerations
8.3. Frequency planning
8.4. Capacity planning

Appendix A: LTE-Advanced
A.1 Carrier Aggregation
A.2 SON and HetNet
A.3 CoMP

v2.5

LTE-Advanced Essentials

Instructor Led | Duration: 1 Day | Course Number: LTE_114


To meet the rapidly growing IP data traffic, 3GPP has introduced an evolution of LTE called LTE-Advanced in 3GPP Release 10. LTE-Advanced is designed to
meet or exceed the requirements of IMT-Advanced, including support for peak downlink data rates of over 1 Gbps. The features in LTE-Advanced are
backwards compatible with existing LTE capabilities, allowing service providers to provide an enhanced user experience while minimizing the cost of
ownership. This course provides a comprehensive look at LTE-Advanced features (R10 and beyond), describing the key requirements, performance targets,
and proposed solutions, including carrier aggregation, enhanced advanced antenna techniques, network relays, and coordinated multipoint (CoMP)
operations.

Course Outline

Intended Audience
This course is intended for individuals in business and leadership
functions, as well as those who need to understand LTE-Advanced and its
evolution from LTE.

Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to:
Identify the motivating factors behind LTE-Advanced
List the functional requirements and performance targets for IMTAdvanced and LTE-Advanced
Define the key features of LTE-Advanced
Explain how basic LTE operations have been enhanced in LTEAdvanced
Describe the important scenarios for LTE-Advanced deployment

Suggested Prerequisites
LTE Essentials (Instructor Led)

1. Overview of LTE-Advanced
1.1. Evolution from LTE (R8) to LTEAdvanced (R10 and beyond)
1.2. IMT-Advanced requirements and LTEAdvanced performance targets
1.3. Key LTE-Advanced features

2. LTE-Advanced Network Architecture

5. Deployment Considerations
5.1.
5.2.
5.3.
5.4.

Deployment challenges
Migration to LTE-Advanced
LTE-Advanced overlays
HetNets and SON

Appendix: Release 9 Enhancements

2.1. R8 E-UTRAN and EPC architectures


2.2. Relays and enhanced Home eNBs in
R10
2.3. UE categories for LTE-Advanced

3. Air Interface Enhancements


3.1. Carrier aggregation (CA)
3.2. Enhanced multiple antenna
techniques
3.3. Coordinated multipoint (CoMP)
3.4. SON enhancements
3.5. HetNets and eICIC

4. Life of an LTE-Advanced UE
4.1. System acquisition
4.2. Network attach and bearer setup
4.3. Uplink and downlink data
transmissions
4.4. Discontinuous reception (DRX)
4.5. Paging and cell reselection

2015 Award
AwardSolutions,
Solutions,Inc.
Inc. www.awardsolutions.com
www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727
+1.972.664.0727
2015

v1.1

23

LTE-Advanced Technical Overview

Instructor Led | Duration: 2 Days | Course Number: LTE_310


This course provides a fundamental understanding of the LTE-Advanced features and the impact they have on the LTE air interface protocols and operations.
LTE-Advanced is introduced in Release 10, and several LTE-Advanced features are specified in Release 11 and future releases. This course offers an in-depth
view of how features such as Carrier Aggregation (CA) and Coordinated Multipoint (CoMP) are implemented. The signaling enhancements to session
establishment and RRC connections are covered as well as changes to mobility and power control procedures for LTE-Advanced. Finally, there is a
comprehensive look at other LTE-Advance features including; enhancements for Self-organizing Networks (SONs), features in support of heterogeneous
networks and enhancements to MIMO techniques.

Intended Audience

Course Outline

This is a detailed technical course, primarily intended for those in system


design, system integration and test, systems engineering, network
engineering, operations, and support.

Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to:
List the key LTE-Advanced features and their benefits
Describe the benefits of Carrier Aggregation and fundamentals of
the feature
Explain the key air interface changes required to support Carrier
Aggregation and show how they are used
Discuss the rationale for Coordinated Multipoint (CoMP) and key
deployment topologies
Outline changes required to implement CoMP and walk through
downlink and uplink data transfer
Describe features supporting heterogeneous network (HetNet)
deployments
Identify changes to MIMO in LTE-Advanced and how they achieve
higher spectral efficiency

Suggested Prerequisites
Mastering LTE Air Interface (Instructor Led)

24

1. LTE-Advanced Overview
1.1. LTE Evolution
1.2. LTE-Advanced promises and
challenges
1.3. Key LTE-Advanced features

2. Network Acquisition and Attach


2.1.
2.2.
2.3.
2.4.

System acquisition and attach


UE capabilities
Reference signals
DL and UL traffic operations

3. Carrier Aggregation (CA) Concepts


3.1.
3.2.
3.3.
3.4.

Benefits of CA
Band combinations
Resource allocation options
Hybrid-ARQ for CA

6. CoMP Operations
6.1. DL joint transmission
6.2. DL dynamic point selection with
muting
6.3. CSI processes
6.4. UL joint reception

7. MIMO, HetNet, SON, and Relay


Nodes
7.1. Antenna technique enhancements
7.2. Support for Heterogeneous
Networks (HetNet)
7.2.1. eICIC
7.3. Self-Organizing Networks (SON)
7.4. Considerations for home eNodeBs
and relay nodes

4. Carrier Aggregation Operations


4.1.
4.2.
4.3.
4.4.

RRC configuration
Cross carrier scheduling
DL/UL data Transfer
Multi-carrier HARQ feedback

5. Coordinated Multipoint (CoMP)


Concepts

Appendix
Release 12 and Beyond
New Carrier Type, 3D Beamforming,
Device-to-Device Communications,
Machine Type Communications

Release 9 Enhancements

5.1. Benefits of CoMP


5.2. CoMP sets
5.3. CoMP topologies

2015 Award
AwardSolutions,
Solutions,Inc.
Inc. www.awardsolutions.com
www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727
+1.972.664.0727
2015

v2.3

Mastering LTE Air Interface

Instructor Led | Duration: 2 Days | Course Number: LTE_301


Long Term Evolution (LTE) is a 4th generation (4G) wireless technology that delivers significantly higher data rates to users (up to 300 Mbps) while reducing
the net cost-per-bit through a number of key enhancements, including OFDM, multiple antenna techniques, and all-IP networks. This course begins with a
discussion of the LTE E-UTRAN architecture and the air interface protocols. It then provides an in-depth explanation of the LTE frame structure, channels, and
multiple antenna techniques, and describes in detail how LTE devices synchronize with the network, establish connections and exchange data over the air.
The impact of mobility on both idle and connected users is explained, showing how active sessions are maintained while the user moves through the network.
The course wraps up with a brief summary of the enhancements offered by the next step in LTE technology, LTE-Advanced.

Intended Audience

Course Outline

This is a detailed technical course, primarily intended for a technical


audience, including those in RF design, development, integration,
deployment and systems engineering.

Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to:
Sketch the E-UTRAN network architecture and explain the roles of
the important nodes and interfaces
Describe the physical structure of the LTE air interface and explain
the key underlying technologies
Define the steps involved in setting up and managing a typical LTE
data session in detail, including:
System acquisition and access
Registration and bearer establishment
Uplink and downlink data transmissions
Identify the mechanisms used to maximize performance and Quality
of Service (QoS) over the air interface, including MIMO and CQI
Explain how LTE tracks idle users and maintains active connections
as the users move through the network

Suggested Prerequisites
LTE Overview (eLearning)

1. Introduction to LTE
1.1.
1.2.
1.3.
1.4.

Goals and requirements of LTE


E-UTRAN nodes and interfaces
LTE air interface protocols
Life of an LTE UE

2. LTE Air Interface Essentials


2.1.
2.2.
2.3.
2.4.

OFDMA and SC-FDMA


LTE frame structure
LTE channels and signals
MIMO techniques in LTE

3. System Acquisition
3.1.
3.2.
3.3.
3.4.

DL synchronization
PCI determination
MIB and SIB processing
System selection

4. System Access
4.1. Random access procedure
4.2. UL synchronization
4.3. RRC connection establishment

5. Data Session Setup


5.1. Initial attach
5.2. Default EPS bearer setup
5.3. QoS management

2015 Award
AwardSolutions,
Solutions,Inc.
Inc. www.awardsolutions.com
www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727
+1.972.664.0727
2015

6. Downlink Operations
6.1. DL transmission process
6.2. Channel quality indicator (CQI)
reporting
6.3. DL scheduling and resource
allocation
6.4. DL data transmission and HARQ
6.5. DL operations using MIMO

7. Uplink Operations
7.1. UL transmission process
7.2. Bandwidth requests
7.3. UL scheduling and resource
allocation
7.4. UL data transmission and HARQ

8. Mobility and Power Control


8.1.
8.2.
8.3.
8.4.
8.5.

RF measurements
Cell selection and reselection
Tracking area updates
Handover
Power control

Appendix A: LTE-Advanced
A.1 Carrier Aggregation
A.2 SON and HetNet
A.3 CoMP

v2.4

25

Mastering TD-LTE Air Interface

Instructor Led | Duration: 2 Days | Course Number: LTE_309


Time Division Duplex Long Term Evolution (TDD LTE or TD-LTE) is a 4th generation (4G) cellular technology that promises a much higher air interface data rate
(over 100 Mbps) to users while reducing the cost per bit for wireless service providers. The building blocks of TD-LTE include OFDM, multiple antenna
techniques, and all-IP technologies. Multiple antenna techniques could increase data rates, throughput, coverage, and lower battery consumption in a mobile
device. This course provides an in-depth discussion of the PHY and MAC layers of the TD-LTE air interface. First, it introduces the E-UTRAN network
architecture and protocols. The Type 2 PHY frame structure, channels, resource allocation, and multiple antenna techniques are described. Finally, the course
discusses the operations of acquisition, system access, data session setup, DL and UL traffic operations and handover.

Course Outline

Intended Audience
This is a detailed technical course, primarily intended for a technical
audience, including those in product design and development, integration
and testing, and system engineering.

Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to:
Sketch the network architecture
Specify air interface protocols
Draw PHY Type 2 frame structure and resource mapping for DL and
UL
Mention roles of DL and UL PHY channels
Describe the synchronization operation and use of reference signals
Summarize the system acquisition and data session setup
procedure
Describe traffic operations in DL and UL at the PHY/MAC layers
Explain cell reselection and handover
Identify the key multiple antenna techniques for the DL and the UL
and specify their applications

Suggested Prerequisites
Overview of OFDM (eLearning)
Multiple Antenna Techniques (eLearning)
LTE Overview (eLearning)

1. Introduction
1.1.
1.2.
1.3.
1.4.
1.5.
1.6.

Motivation for TD-LTE or TDD LTE


Goals and requirements of LTE
LTE network nodes and interfaces
Comparison of FDD LTE & TDD LTE
LTE air interface protocols
Life of a mobile in LTE

2. TD-LTE Technology
2.1. Access techniques OFDMA and SCFDMA
2.2. TD-LTE Type 2 frame structure
2.3. S- Subframe and subframe patterns
2.4. TD-LTE DL/UL configurations
2.5. PHY channels and resource mapping

3. System Acquisition
3.1. DL synchronization in TD-LTE
3.2. System selection

4. System Access Operation


4.1.
4.2.
4.3.
4.4.

UL synchronization
TD-LTE random access procedure
TD-LTE preamble configurations
RRC connection establishment

5. TD-LTE Call Setup


5.1. Initial attach
5.2. EPS bearer setup

6. Downlink Operations
6.1. DL transmission process
6.2. Channel quality reporting
6.3. DL scheduling and resource
allocation
6.4. Data transmission in DL Subframe
6.5. Data transmission in S-Subframe
6.6. HARQ bundling and multiplexing
6.7. DL operations using MIMO

7. Uplink Operations
7.1. UL transmission process
7.2. Bandwidth requests
7.3. UL scheduling and resource
allocation
7.4. UL data transmission and HARQ
7.5. TTI bundling
7.6. UL operations using MIMO

8. Mobility and Power Control


8.1.
8.2.
8.3.
8.4.
8.5.

Tracking area
Cell reselection
Paging
Handover message flow
Power control in TD-LTE

Appendix A: OFDM Essentials


(OFDM/OFDMA and SC-FDMA)
Appendix B: Advanced Antenna
Techniques

26

2015 Award
AwardSolutions,
Solutions,Inc.
Inc. www.awardsolutions.com
www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727
+1.972.664.0727
2015

v1.2

LTE Protocols and Signaling

Instructor Led | Duration: 3 Days | Course Number: LTE_302


LTE promises dramatic improvements in throughput and latency, which opens a new era in Quality of Service (QoS). These enhancements are based on
several fundamental pillars: A new air interface (OFDM+MIMO), simplified network architecture and efficient air interface structure and signaling mechanisms.
This course takes a detailed look at the layer 2 and 3 signaling procedures as defined in 3GPP specifications. The main focus is on UE-E-UTRAN and UE-EPC
signaling. The course also provides an overview of the end-to-end default and dedicated EPS bearer setup including QoS considerations. Intra-LTE mobility
and LTE-non-LTE interworking are also illustrated.

Intended Audience

Course Outline

This course is primarily intended for a technical audience in design, test,


systems engineering or product support that wants to understand LTE
signaling details.

Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to:
Sketch the network architecture of LTE
Explain the detailed setup of the RRC connection between the UE
and the E-UTRAN
Describe the roles of the MAC, RLC, PDCP, and RRC protocols
Describe the roles of protocols associated with S1, X2, and NAS
Illustrate the initial attach operation
Explain the implementation of QoS and security
Summarize traffic operations for UL and DL
Describe various handover scenarios and the associated signaling
procedures
Describe interworking between LTE and 3GPP systems and LTE and
non-3GPP systems

Suggested Prerequisites
LTE Overview (eLearning)

1. LTE Network Architecture


1.1. Architecture and node functions
1.2. Interfaces and associated protocols
1.3. Identities of the UE, E-UTRAN, and
EPC

2. LTE-Uu Interface Protocols


2.1. PHY frame and channels
2.2. MAC, RLC, PDCP, and RRC

3. E-UTRAN and NAS Protocols


3.1. S1 and X2 interfaces and associated
protocols
3.2. NAS states and functions
3.3. GTPv1 and GTPv2

4. System Acquisition
4.1. Power-up synchronization
4.2. System Information Blocks

5. System Access
5.1.
5.2.
5.3.
5.4.
5.5.

Random access
RRC connection setup
Timing alignment
DRX operation
Power control

6. Attach to the Network


6.1.
6.2.
6.3.
6.4.
6.5.

Overview of attach
Selection of MME
Authentication and key agreement
Integrity protection and encryption
AS and NAS security

2015 Award
AwardSolutions,
Solutions,Inc.
Inc. www.awardsolutions.com
www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727
+1.972.664.0727
2015

7. Initial PDN Connection


7.1. S-GW and P-GW selection
7.2. Default bearer setup
7.3. IP address allocation

8. Idle Mode and Paging


8.1. Paging operation
8.2. Tracking area update

9. Service Establishment and QoS


9.1. QoS parameters
9.2. EPS bearers and TFTs
9.3. PCC architecture

10. Traffic and Bandwidth


Management
10.1. Channel quality reporting
10.2. DL/UL scheduling
10.3. DL/UL traffic operations

11. Mobility in LTE


11.1. X2-based mobility
11.2. S1-based mobility

12. Interoperability
12.1. Measurement
12.2. 3GPP mobility
12.3. Non-3GPP mobility

v2.0

27

LTE-EPC Networks and Signaling

Instructor Led | Duration: 3 Days | Course Number: LTE_305


The LTE Evolved Packet System (EPS) is an evolution of the 3GPP system architecture with the vision of an all-IP network finally realized. EPS consists of the
Evolved UTRAN (E-UTRAN) and Evolved Packet Core (EPC). EPC supports mobility with the existing 3GPP and non-3GPP wireless networks to facilitate smooth
migration, interworking, and service continuity across these networks. The EPC and E-UTRAN will be optimized for the delivery of IP-based services. EPS will
use IMS as the services network and manage QoS across the system, enabling a dynamic mix of voice, video, and data services. This course provides a
detailed look at the architecture of the EPC and the signaling among the UE, E-UTRAN and EPC network components.

Course Outline

Intended Audience
This course is designed for those involved in development, integration,
deployment and engineering of LTE-EPC wireless systems.

Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to:

Sketch the EPC architecture


Describe the components that make up the EPC and their roles
List the key protocols of LTE-EPC like NAS, GTP and Diameter
Explain how authentication and security are achieved in the EPC
Describe the different options for IP address allocation
Describe an EPS bearer setup
Explain the role of the PCC network
Explain how services are added and how QoS requirements are
managed
Describe connectivity to multiple APNs (PDN connections)
Explain X2- and S1-based handovers
Describe deployment considerations

Suggested Prerequisites
LTE Overview (eLearning)
LTE SAE Evolved Packet Core (EPC) Overview (eLearning)

1. LTE-EPC Network Architecture


1.1. Roaming and non-roaming
architecture
1.2. Roles of HSS, MME, S-GW, P-GW,
and PCRF
1.3. Key features and services

2. LTE-EPC Protocols
2.1. Roles of EMM and ESM
2.2. GTPv2-C and GTP-U
2.3. Roles of SCTP and diameter

3. LTE-EPC Signaling Fundamentals


3.1. Network and UE identities
3.2. EPS and signaling bearers
3.3. PDN connections and APNs

4. Security in LTE-EPC
4.1. Security architecture
4.2. Authentication and Key Agreement
(AKA)
4.3. NAS and AS security

5. Network Access in LTE-EPC


5.1.
5.2.
5.3.
5.4.

6. QoS and PCC Framework in LTE-EPC


6.1.
6.2.
6.3.
6.4.

28

Initial attach procedure


MME, S-GW and P-GW selection
Default EPS bearer setup
IP address allocation
PCC architecture
AF, PCRF, PCEF, SPR
QoS class identifiers
Traffic flow templates

2015 Award
AwardSolutions,
Solutions,Inc.
Inc. www.awardsolutions.com
www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727
+1.972.664.0727
2015

7. Session Establishment and PDN


Connectivity
7.1.
7.2.
7.3.
7.4.
7.5.
7.6.

Dedicated EPS bearer setup


Multiple PDN connectivity
EMM states
Paging operation
Dedicated bearer deactivation
Dedicated bearer modification

8. Intra-LTE Mobility
8.1. X2-based handover
8.2. S1-based handover
8.3. Tracking area updates

9. IMS and Support for Voice


9.1.
9.2.
9.3.
9.4.

IMS and seamless mobility


Circuit-Switched Fallback (CSFB)
Voice Call Continuity (VCC)
Single Radio Voice Call Continuity
(SRVCC)

10. Deployment Considerations


10.1. Evolving to EPC network
10.2. Interworking with Release 8 and
Pre-Release 8 3GPP networks
10.3. Interworking with Non-3GPP
networks

11. End-to-End Flow


11.1. Review of attach procedure
11.2. Review of service addition

v2.1

LTE-EPC Networks and Signaling (Architecture, Attach)


Instructor Led | Duration: 2 Days | Course Number: LTE_313

The LTE Evolved Packet System (EPS) is an evolution of the 3GPP system architecture with the vision of an all-IP network finally realized. EPS consists of the
Evolved UTRAN (E-UTRAN) and Evolved Packet Core (EPC). EPC supports mobility with the existing 3GPP and non-3GPP wireless networks to facilitate smooth
migration, interworking, and service continuity across these networks. The EPC and E-UTRAN will be optimized for the delivery of IP-based services. EPS will
use IMS as the services network and manage QoS across the system, enabling a dynamic mix of voice, video, and data services. This course provides a
detailed look at the architecture of the EPC and the signaling among the UE, E-UTRAN and EPC network components.

Course Outline

Intended Audience
This course is designed for those involved in development, integration,
deployment and engineering of LTE-EPC wireless systems.

Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to:

Sketch the EPC architecture


Describe the components that make up the EPC and their roles
List the key protocols of LTE-EPC like NAS, GTP and Diameter
Explain how authentication and security are achieved in the EPC
Describe the different options for IP address allocation
Describe an EPS bearer setup
Describe connectivity to multiple APNs (PDN connections)
Explain X2- and S1-based handovers
Describe deployment considerations

Suggested Prerequisites
LTE Overview (eLearning)
LTE SAE Evolved Packet Core (EPC) Overview (eLearning)

1. LTE-EPC Network Architecture


1.1. Roaming and non-roaming
architecture
1.2. Roles of HSS, MME, S-GW, P-GW,
and PCRF
1.3. Key features and services

2. LTE-EPC Protocols
2.1. Roles of EMM and ESM
2.2. GTPv2-C and GTP-U
2.3. Roles of SCTP and diameter

3. LTE-EPC Signaling Fundamentals


3.1. Network and UE identities
3.2. EPS and signaling bearers
3.3. PDN connections and APNs

4. Security in LTE-EPC
4.1. Security architecture
4.2. Authentication and Key Agreement
(AKA)
4.3. NAS and AS security

6. Intra-LTE Mobility
6.1. X2-based handover
6.2. S1-based handover
6.3. Tracking area updates

7. IMS and Support for Voice


7.1.
7.2.
7.3.
7.4.

IMS and seamless mobility


Circuit-Switched Fallback (CSFB)
Voice Call Continuity (VCC)
Single Radio Voice Call Continuity
(SRVCC)

8. Deployment Considerations
8.1. Evolving to EPC network
8.2. Interworking with Release 8 and
Pre-Release 8 3GPP networks
8.3. Interworking with Non-3GPP
networks

9. End-to-End Flow
9.1. Review of attach procedure
9.2. Review of service addition

5. Network Access in LTE-EPC


5.1.
5.2.
5.3.
5.4.

Initial attach procedure


MME, S-GW and P-GW selection
Default EPS bearer setup
IP address allocation

2015 Award
AwardSolutions,
Solutions,Inc.
Inc. www.awardsolutions.com
www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727
+1.972.664.0727
2015

v1.0

29

eMBMS Protocols and Signaling

Instructor Led | Duration: 1.5 Days | Course Number: LTE_425


Evolved MBMS is an exciting opportunity for mobile operators to efficiently deliver broadcast and multicast services. eMBMS fits very well and can share the
infrastructure that operators are setting up for LTE. This course takes a detailed look at eMBMS architecture, protocols and Interfaces (both RAN and Core) to
provide unicast/broadcast/multicast services. It covers call flows (signaling messages and related parameters) for various scenarios. This course covers
system access, connecting to the eUTRAN, eMBMS registration, MBMS bearer setup, eMBMS call flows, handovers and inter-RAT operations in detail.

Intended Audience

Course Outline

Technical personnel in RF engineering, systems engineering, transport


engineering, network engineering, network operations, and anyone seeking
a more in depth understanding of eMBMS.

Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to:

Sketch the network architecture of eMBMS with LTE


(E-UTRAN/EPC)
Describe the protocols, interfaces and nodes used in the eMBMS
architecture
Describe the LTE frame structure, DL and UL channels used to
provide eMBMS services
Step through the eMBMS call flow using LTE access
Illustrate eMBMS registration. access operation, including security
and IP address assignment
Explain QoS implementation and enforcement for eMBMS services
Summarize traffic operations for UL and DL
Describe various handover scenarios and the associated signaling
procedures

1. eMBMS Network Architecture


1.1. Motivation for eMBMS
1.2. eMBMS network architecture
1.3. eMBMS protocols and interfaces for
LTE access

2. LTE Air Interface for eMBMS


2.1. LTE frame structure
2.2. LTE channels and signals
2.3. MBMS channels mapping to
resources
2.4. Identities of UE, eNodeB and EPC

4. eMBMS Service Establishment and


QoS
4.1. eMBMS multicast service
activation and de-activation
4.2. eMBMS broadcast service
activation and de-activation
4.3. QoS with eMBMS bearer
4.4. MBMS services with other CS/PS
services
4.5. eMBMS DL and UL traffic on air
interface

3. eMBMS Session Establishment


3.1.
3.2.
3.3.
3.4.
3.5.
3.6.
3.7.

LTE network acquisition for eMBMS


eMBMS registration
eMBMS notification
eMBMS session start procedure
eMBMS session stop procedure
eMBMS bearer establishment
Security for eMBMS

Suggested Prerequisites

30

LTE Overview (eLearning)

2015
2015 Award
AwardSolutions,
Solutions,Inc.
Inc.www.awardsolutions.com
www.awardsolutions.com+1.972.664.0727
+1.972.664.0727

v1.0

SON: Self Organizing Network Features in LTE and LTE-Advanced


Instructor Led | Duration: 1.5 Days | Course Number: LTE_424

Mobile Operators need to reduce manual intervention in the installation, maintenance, and performance tuning of network elements to reduce costs, avoid
down-times due to human errors, and shorten deployment cycles. HetNets make this need acute and urgent. 3GPP standards have introduced features
(broadly referred to Self-Organizing Networks features) since release R8 to automate many tasks. SON features include Automatic Inventory, Automatic
Software Download, Automatic Neighbor Relation (ANR), automatic PCI assignment, Mobility Robustness/Handover Optimization (MRO), RACH Optimization,
Load Balancing, ICIC and eICIC for HetNets, Coverage/Capacity Optimization(CCO), Self-healing, Minimization of Drive Testing, and Energy Savings, with an eye
to multi-layer, multi-RAT, and multi-vendor coordination in future. This course covers key SON features defined in releases R8-R11 and the SON architecture.

Intended Audience

Course Outline

This is an intermediate level course for LTE network planners, designers,


engineers, and managers. It assumes working knowledge of LTE
architecture.

Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to:
Explain the benefits of automating network administration tasks
List the major use cases outlined by the Next Generation Mobile
Networks (NGMN) Alliance for day-to-day carrier operations
List by major release, the key features of SON being standardized by
3GPP
Describe the need and the working of key SON features, including:
Automatic Neighbor Relations (ANR)
Automatic PCI Assignment
Mobility Robustness/Handover Optimization (MRO)
Coverage/Capacity Optimization (CCO)
RACH Optimization
Load Balancing
ICIC and eICIC
Minimization of Drive Testing
Energy Savings

1. SON Requirements
1.1. Example manual tasks
1.2. NGMN Alliance use cases for carrier
operations
1.3. Role of various standards bodies
1.4. SON definition and roadmap

2. Self-Configuration
2.1. Automatic Neighbor Relations (ANR)
2.2. Automatic PCI assignment

3. Automated Optimization
3.1. Mobility Robustness/Handover
Optimization (MRO)
3.2. RACH optimization
3.3. Minimization of Drive Testing (MDT)
3.4. Coverage and Capacity Optimization
(CCO)
3.5. Load balancing

6. SON Software Architecture


6.1. SON functions and network
parameters
6.2. 3GPP management architecture
6.3. 3GPP management application
layer protocols
6.4. Centralized, distributed, hybrid
SON architecture
6.5. Integration reference points

7. Deployment Considerations
7.1. Network impact
7.1.1. Backhaul and transport
7.1.2. Signaling overhead
7.2. ROI OPEX gains
7.3. Automation challenges
7.4. Multi-vendor networks
7.5. SON ecosystem

4. Inter-Carrier Interference Coordination


4.1. ICIC and eICIC
4.2. The need
4.3. Implementation

5. Energy Savings
5.1. The need
5.2. Implementation

Suggested Prerequisite
Working knowledge of LTE architecture and operations

2015
2015 Award
AwardSolutions,
Solutions,Inc.
Inc. www.awardsolutions.com
www.awardsolutions.com+1.972.664.0727
+1.972.664.0727

v1.031

VoLTE Essentials

Instructor Led | Duration: 1 Day | Course Number: LTE_116


LTE is defined as an all-IP network without any circuit-switched network elements; as a consequence, LTE subscribers must receive their voice services
through voice over IP (VoIP). VoLTE (Voice over LTE) is based on the IMS (IP Multimedia Subsystem) framework and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP), and is the
preferred solution for delivering voice in LTE networks. Wireless service providers around the globe have agreed to deploy VoLTE in order to ensure a smooth
migration of voice services and seamless interoperability among the VoLTE equipment vendors and operators. This course provides a high-level end-to-end
understanding of the VoLTE/IMS core network architecture, an overview of voice and video services, and a description of key VoLTE call scenarios, along with
a discussion of important VoLTE deployment considerations.

Course Outline

Intended Audience
This course is intended for individuals who need a high-level overview of
the LTE and IMS VoLTE networks, end-to-end signaling and traffic flows,
and VoLTE operational scenarios.

Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the participant will be able to:
Sketch the LTE and IMS architectures for VoLTE and describe the
functions supported by each VoLTE network component
Describe the key operations needed to establish and maintain
VoLTE sessions, including:
IMS registration
Call establishment
Dedicated bearer setup
QoS management
Illustrate the end-to-end signaling and traffic paths for VoLTE
Explain how VoLTE calls interwork with the PSTN and 3G networks
Identify the key considerations for deploying VoLTE and monitoring
monitoring VoLTE operations

Suggested Prerequisites
VoLTE Overview (eLearning)

32

1. LTE-IMS VoLTE Overview


1.1.
1.2.
1.3.
1.4.
1.5.

What is VoLTE?
Role of LTE and IMS for VoLTE
Voice and video features in LTE
Network enhancements for VoLTE
State of VoLTE deployment

2. LTE-IMS Network Architecture


2.1. IMS network architecture
2.2. Key IMS entities and protocols
2.3. Role of DRA/SLF

3. Registration in VoLTE
3.1. Life of an LTE IMS UE
3.2. IMS registration
3.3. Default bearer connectivity to IMS

5. VoLTE to PSTN/3G Calls


5.1.
5.2.
5.3.
5.4.

Interworking considerations
Role of MGCF and MGW
SR-VCC and eSR-VCC
End-to-end signaling and traffic
paths

6. VoLTE Deployment
6.1.
6.2.
6.3.
6.4.
6.5.

Device and network changes


Role of RCS
VoLTE KPIs
VoLTE coverage requirements
Voice quality considerations

4. VoLTE Call Setup


4.1. End-to-end VoLTE-to-VoLTE call
setup
4.2. Roles of ENUM and TAS
4.3. Dedicated bearer setup
4.4. End-to-end signaling and traffic
paths

2015 Award
AwardSolutions,
Solutions,Inc.
Inc. www.awardsolutions.com
www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727
+1.972.664.0727
2015

v2.2

Exploring IMS/VoLTE Networks

Instructor Led | Duration: 2 Days | Course Number: LTE_207


VoLTE (Voice over LTE) is the preferred solution for delivering voice over LTE networks, based on the IP Multimedia Subsystem (IMS) architecture. This course
is designed to present IMS/VoLTE architecture and call flow scenarios from the perspective of a typical wireless operator. The course starts with a detailed
look at the end-to-end IMS core architecture in a wireless operators typical VoLTE network then steps through the various stages of interactions of User
Equipment (UE) and LTE Radio, EPC and IMS network elements. Discussions cover initial IMS/VoLTE registration, covers the details of key service scenario
such as IMS registration, VoLTE to VoLTE call setup and VoLTE to PSTN/3G call setup. The role of key nodes during call setup such as ENUM and TAS is
covered. Finally, the topics of VoLTE KPIs and impact to the UE, RAN and core networks are covered for VoLTE deployment.

Course Outline

Intended Audience
This course is intended for those seeking technical details of a typical
VoLTE network architecture and its operations.

Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the participant will be able to:
Sketch VoLTE architecture and describe the functions supported by
each VoLTE network component
Identify key interfaces and related protocols such as SIP, Diameter,
RTP, H.248
Step through the key VoLTE operations:
IMS registration
VoLTE to VoLTE call setup
New bearer setup for VoLTE QoS
VoLTE interworking with PSTN/3G

Sketch an end-to-end signaling and traffic paths for VoLTE


Describe how QoS is enforced in LTE network for VoLTE
List the quality and capacity related KPIs for monitoring of VoLTE
operations

Required Prerequisites
VoLTE Overview (eLearning)

1. VoLTE Overview
1.1.
1.2.
1.3.
1.4.

What is VoLTE?
Role of LTE and IMS for VoLTE
Voice and video features
Enhancements for VoLTE

2. VoLTE in LTE Networks


2.1.
2.2.
2.3.
2.4.

VoLTE IMS architecture


VoLTE call model
Role of CSCFs
Role of DRA and SLF

3. Registration in VoLTE
3.1.
3.2.
3.3.
3.4.
3.5.
3.6.
3.7.
3.8.

Default bearer connectivity to IMS


P-CSCF discovery
SIP, SDP, Diameter, H.248, RTP
Private and public user identities
User registration
App servers such as TAS, PS, SCC
Registrations with app servers
Exercise: End-to-end message ladder
diagram of VoLTE registration

4. VoLTE Call Setup


4.1. End-to-end VoLTE to VoLTE call setup
4.2. ENUM and TAS during VoLTE call
setup
4.3. VoLTE call release

2015 Award
AwardSolutions,
Solutions,Inc.
Inc. www.awardsolutions.com
www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727
+1.972.664.0727
2015

4.4. Exercise: End-to-end message


ladder diagram of VoLTE to VoLTE
call

5. QoS for VoLTE Calls


5.1. P-CSCF, PCRF, and P-GW for QoS
enforcement
5.2. Dedicated bearer setup
5.3. QoS enforcement and scheduling
5.4. Dedicated bearer release

6. VoLTE Interworking Calls


6.1.
6.2.
6.3.
6.4.

ENUM for PSTN/3G call setup


MGCF, MGW, MRFC, MRFP
Signaling and traffic paths
Exercise: End-to-end message
ladder diagram of VoLTE to NonVoLTE call

7. VoLTE Deployment
7.1. New network nodes for VoLTE in
MTSO
7.2. eNB, S-GW, P-GW enhancements
7.3. Device impact
7.4. VoLTE KPIs

v1.0

33

VoLTE and IMS in LTE-EPC Networks


Instructor Led | Duration: 3 Days | Course Number: LTE_203

The LTE Evolved Packet Core (EPC) is an evolution of the 3GPP system architecture with the vision of an all-IP network finally realized. EPC in conjunction with
IP Multimedia Subsystem (IMS) delivers various services such as VoIP, SMS, Video call, Picture share, IM and Presence. EPC and IMS support mobility with the
existing 2G/3G wireless networks as well as PSTN to facilitate smooth migration, interworking and service continuity across these networks. This course
provides a detailed look at the architecture of the LTE EPC, IMS and QoS framework to deliver end-to-end voice (Voice over LTE VoLTE) in LTE networks. It
also covers various service scenario walk-throughs that utilize IMS and EPC network components. The IMS service architecture and the interaction with
existing services are described.

Intended Audience

Course Outline

This course is designed for those involved in deployment and engineering


of next generation wireless networks and services based on LTE-EPC and
IMS.

Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to:
Sketch the EPC architecture and describe the role of various nodes
in establishing a data session in LTE for IMS signaling
Sketch the IMS network architecture and identify the role of key
network nodes, interfaces, and related protocols
List various protocols used in IMS networks to support VoIP
Step through the IMS registration procedure
Explain the role of the PCC network to deliver QoS
Step through the interactions between LTE-EPC and IMS nodes to
establish a VoIP call
Step through the interworking of IMS with non-IMS networks such
as PSTN
Describe the IMS services architecture
Discuss role of AS, RCS, MMTel, and ICS, and support for legacy
services
Sketch the charging architecture in LTE-EPC and IMS networks

Suggested Prerequisites
Overview of IMS (eLearning)
LTE SAE Evolved Packet Core (EPC) Overview (eLearning)

34

1. LTE/EPC Network Essentials


1.1. LTE-EPC network architecture
1.2. Network nodes and roles of HSS,
MME, S-GW, P-GW, and PCRF
1.3. Network interfaces and protocols

2. IMS Architecture
2.1.
2.2.
2.3.
2.4.

IMS network architecture


Role of CSCF, MGCF, MGW, HSS, AS
User addressing in IMS
End-to-end signaling and traffic flow

3. Protocols for VoIP and IMS


3.1.
3.2.
3.3.
3.4.

Diameter
SIP and SDP
H.248 (Megaco)
RTP and RTCP

4. VoLTE Pre-Call Functions


4.1.
4.2.
4.3.
4.4.

PDN connection for IMS APN


Default EPS bearer setup
IMS registration
IMS authentication

5. QoS Framework in LTE-EPC


5.1.
5.2.
5.3.
5.4.
5.5.

QoS classes in LTE-EPC


PCC architecture
PCRF, PCEF, and AS
Interfaces: Gx, Rx
SDF, SDF aggregation, TFT

2015 Award
AwardSolutions,
Solutions,Inc.
Inc. www.awardsolutions.com
www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727
+1.972.664.0727
2015

6. VoLTE Call Management


6.1.
6.2.
6.3.
6.4.
6.5.

VoIP call setup in IMS


PCC interactions
SIP/SDP message details
Media format considerations
Emergency calls

7. Interworking in IMS
7.1. IMS PSTN interworking
7.2. Roaming in IMS
7.3. Role of IPX

8. IMS Services Framework


8.1. Service architecture and role of
AS
8.2. Telephony Application server
(TAS)
8.3. Example supplementary services
8.4. Role of RCS and MMTel

9. SMS over IP Using IMS


9.1. SMS delivery architecture
9.2. SMS origination and termination
9.3. SMS interworking

10. IMS Charging Architecture


10.1. Overview of network nodes
10.2. Offline and online charging

v1.5

VoLTE Signaling and Operations

Instructor Led | Duration: 3 Days | Course Number: LTE_427


This is an intermediate level course that builds on participants knowledge of VoLTE and the IMS architecture. Participants analyze real-world VoLTE/SIP logs
collected from commercial VoLTE networks using drive test equipment. The IMS infrastructure is simulated using Open IMS, so participants also analyze SIP
signaling messages in the IMS domain. This course uses a scenario- based approach, allowing participants to step through key scenarios such as VoLTE
registration, VoLTE to VoLTE calls, and Interworking with the PSTN/3G and emergency calls. Log analysis is emphasized where logs are available. Other topics
are explored using detailed message flow diagrams.

Course Outline

Intended Audience
This course is designed for those involved in VoLTE deployment in LTE RAN
and EPC networks.

1. LTE and IMS Network Architecture

Learning Objectives

2. Bearer Setup for IMS APN

After completing this course, the student will be able to:


Sketch the VoLTE network architecture
Walk through the following scenarios and identify the SIP messages
and related parameters for:
VoLTE registration
VoLTE to VoLTE call setup and release
VoLTE to PSTN interworking
Voice Call Continuity (if applicable)
Emergency Calls

Step through the dedicated bearer setup during VoLTE call initiation
Elaborate on Voice Call Continuity features to interwork with
erstwhile RAN technologies
Identify the LTE RAN enhancements required to support VoLTE

1.1. LTE-EPC network architecture


2.1. PDN connection for VoLTE
2.2. Default bearer setup

3. VoLTE Registration
3.1.
3.2.
3.3.
3.4.
3.5.

IMS registration
SIP signaling with P-CSCF
User identities for VoLTE
Application registration
Exercise: LTE-IMS registration

4. VoLTE Call Setup


4.1.
4.2.
4.3.
4.4.

Call setup scenario overview


VoLTE call initiation signaling
Voice codec options
Exercise: End-to-end VoLTE call

7. Emergency Call Support


7.1. Emergency session call flows
7.2. LTE bearer registration and
resource request
7.3. P-CSCF discovery and IMS
emergency registration
7.4. Establish emergency session
7.5. Concepts and definitions

8. RAN Enhancements for VoLTE


8.1.
8.2.
8.3.
8.4.

AMR and RTP


SPS
TTI Bundling
RoHC

5. VoLTE Interworking Calls


5.1. Interworking Overview
5.2. VoLTE to PSTN
5.3. PSTN to VoLTE

Required Equipment
Laptop for VoLTE log analysis

Suggested Prerequisites

6. Voice Call Continuity

VoLTE Essentials or Exploring IMS/VoLTE Networks (Instructor Led)

6.1. SRVCC/eSRVCC network architecture


6.2. VCC call setup

Special Note
Section 3 and 4 will be covered using air interface logs collected from a VoLTE
network and generic SIP logs using open source IMS.

2015
2015 Award
AwardSolutions,
Solutions,Inc.
Inc. www.awardsolutions.com
www.awardsolutions.com+1.972.664.0727
+1.972.664.0727

v1.035

LTE RAN Performance Essentials

Instructor Led | Duration: 1 Day | Course Number: LTE_115


The LTE air interface leverages several advanced radio technologies to deliver higher data rates and higher capacity to mobile subscribers, including OFDM
and MIMO. The unique characteristics of these techniques require careful planning and optimization in order to maximize the overall coverage, capacity and
performance of the LTE RAN. This course focuses on the challenges that RAN engineers typically face, both during initial deployment and in later growth
phases. This course provides a high-level overview of LTE performance-related issues, including low cell-edge throughput, low downlink and uplink cell
throughput, poor MIMO performance, RRC connection setup failures and drops, UE context drops, and bearer setup and bearer drops.

Course Outline

Intended Audience
This course is intended for those in leadership functions as well as those
who need to understand and consider RF-related issues in LTE.

1. LTE RAN KPIs

Learning Objectives

2. Coverage and Accessibility

After completing this course, the participants will be able to:


Define the LTE RAN KPIs and map them to the corresponding LTE
RAN operations
Associate important LTE signaling events with success and failure
operational counters
Identify the RF measurements that are key to coverage and
interference and discuss how they impact the accessibility KPIs
Identify events that lead to context and bearer drops
Describe downlink and uplink traffic operations and discuss the
importance of CQI for improved throughput
Calculate Resource Block utilization and its effect on cell capacity
Define the KPIs for handover and interworking performance

1.1. LTE RAN KPIs overview


1.2. LTE signaling to KPI mapping
2.1. Defining right coverage
2.2. RSRP, RSRQ and SINR
measurements
2.3. RRC connection and context setup
performance

3. Drops and Retainability


3.1. Radio link failures
3.2. UE context and E-RAB drop KPIs

4. Throughput and Capacity


4.1.
4.2.
4.3.
4.4.

DL and UL operations
CQI and MCS/MIMO selection
RB utilization and capacity planning
Interference Coordination (ICIC)

5. Interworking and Handovers

Suggested Prerequisites
LTE Overview (eLearning)

36

5.1. Intra- and inter-frequency handovers


5.2. Idle mode IRAT selection
5.3. Automatic Neighbor Relation (ANR)

2015 Award
AwardSolutions,
Solutions,Inc.
Inc. www.awardsolutions.com
www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727
+1.972.664.0727
2015

v1.0

LTE RF Planning and Design Certification Workshop


Instructor Led | Duration: 5 Days | Course Number: LTE_401

LTE offers significant improvements over previous mobile wireless systems in terms of data speeds and capacity, through the use of technologies such as
OFDMA and multiple antenna techniques. However, these gains are realized only with careful planning and design in the LTE Radio Access Network (RAN), to
maximize the efficiency of available RF spectrum. This hands-on workshop guides participants through the theory and practice of RF planning and design for
LTE RANs. Participants will apply their understanding of the LTE air interface physical structure and related concepts to calculate the link budgets to support
the market coverage and performance requirements, and to determine optimal network parameter settings. Participants will use actual planning inputs and a
coverage prediction tool for exercises to apply their knowledge and skills to real-world scenarios, and the class concludes with a certification assessment.

Intended Audience

Course Outline

This workshop is intended for LTE RF design and system performance


engineers.

Learning Objectives
After completing this workshop, the student will be able to:
Apply a consistent process to radio network planning and design
Use RSRP and RSRQ measurements to assess LTE RAN RF
performance
Map network requirements to corresponding system parameters
Construct uplink/downlink link budgets to meet specific
performance requirements
Use coverage and capacity requirements to determine the optimal
radio network design
Exploit multiple antenna techniques to optimize coverage and
performance
Estimate the maximum cell site air interface capacity based on a
specific traffic model
Determine optimal LTE configuration and operational parameter
settings to maximize system performance
Describe the key parameters and operations related to customerspecific Inter-RAT deployment

Required Equipment
PC laptop with administrator privileges

Suggested Prerequisites
Overview of OFDM (eLearning)
LTE Overview (eLearning)

1. Overview of LTE Radio Network Design


1.1. Radio network design goals
1.2. Planning inputs and outputs
1.3. LTE RAN planning process

2. LTE Air Interface


2.1.
2.2.
2.3.
2.4.
2.5.

E-UTRAN architecture
LTE Physical layer structure
Air interface resources
UE measurements (RSRP/RSRQ)
RSRP/RSRQ exercises

3. Market and Engineering Requirements


3.1.
3.2.
3.3.
3.4.

Coverage requirements
Capacity requirements
QoS requirements
Engineering requirements

4. LTE Link Budget


4.1.
4.2.
4.3.
4.4.

Cell edge throughput calculations


Link budget for UL and DL
Role of RRH and TMA
UL/DL link budget exercises

5. RF Design and Site Selection


5.1.
5.2.
5.3.
5.4.
5.5.

RF design process and options


Morphology definitions
Propagation models
RF design tool configuration
Coverage prediction

2015 Award
AwardSolutions,
Solutions,Inc.
Inc. www.awardsolutions.com
www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727
+1.972.664.0727
2015

6. Antennas in LTE Networks


6.1.
6.2.
6.3.
6.4.

Multiple antenna techniques


Downlink feedback (CQI/RI/PMI)
Deployment considerations
Coverage prediction exercises

7. LTE Capacity Planning


7.1.
7.2.
7.3.
7.4.

Data traffic modeling


Air interface capacity estimation
Backhaul capacity planning
Triggers for capacity planning

8. RF Configuration Parameters
8.1.
8.2.
8.3.
8.4.
8.5.

Frequency planning
Sync signal and PCI planning
Reference signal planning
RA preamble planning
PCI and RACH planning exercises

9. RF Operational Parameters
9.1. Cell selection/reselection
planning
9.2. Handover planning
9.3. Power control planning

10. Radio Network KPIs


10.1. User-centric KPIs
10.2. Network performance KPIs
10.3. System utilization KPIs

11. Interworking with 2G/3G


11.1. System selection/reselection
planning
11.2. Inter-RAT handover planning

v1.9

37

LTE RAN Capacity Planning Certification Workshop


Instructor Led | Duration: 3 Days | Course Number: LTE_408

LTE (Long Term Evolution) uses the Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access Network (E-UTRAN) architecture, a distributed and unified IP-based access
network, to efficiently deliver Internet services to wireless subscribers. This course defines a practical approach to LTE RAN capacity planning, using field data
to assess the capacity demand on the LTE RAN, forecast future requirements, identify potential capacity bottlenecks, and determine optimal capacity
solutions. Throughout the workshop, students apply the knowledge gained in hands-on exercises, using simulated network data and key performance
indicators (KPIs) to estimate subscriber activity, market trends, and platform performance; this approach gives the students practical experience in estimating
LTE demand and applying the capacity planning process in a real world environment.

Intended Audience

Course Outline

This course is designed for RAN and system engineers involved in capacity
planning, design, deployment and operation of LTE networks.

Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to:
Answer the top 10 questions about LTE RAN capacity
Explain the required inputs and expected outputs of each step in
the capacity planning process
Define the counters and KPIs available to assess RAN capacity
Identify the key symptoms of capacity-related issues in the RAN
Forecast future requirements based on current demand
Estimate the impact of new LTE service offerings such as Voice over
LTE (VoLTE) and video
Compare forecasted demand with current RAN capabilities to
identify possible bottlenecks
Evaluate potential RAN capacity enhancements to determine the
most appropriate solution for capacity concerns

Required Equipment
PC laptop

1. LTE RAN Capacity Planning


1.1.
1.2.
1.3.
1.4.
1.5.
1.6.

Top 10 capacity questions


Capacity planning process
E-UTRAN architecture
Capacity limitations
Market definition
Capacity planning exercises

2. RAN Capacity Measurement


2.1.
2.2.
2.3.
2.4.
2.5.
2.6.

Capacity counters and KPIs


Measuring demand
Estimating demand
Resource utilization
Detecting capacity issues
Capacity measurement exercises

3. RAN Capacity Forecasting


3.1.
3.2.
3.3.
3.4.
3.5.
3.6.

Forecasting approaches
Changes to demand
Service impacts (VoLTE, video, etc.)
Resource implications
Effective bandwidth estimation
Capacity forecasting exercises

4. RAN Capacity Analysis


4.1. Capacity constraints (bandwidth,
licensing, resources, etc.)
4.2. Estimating air interface bandwidth
4.3. Current capacity vs. forecasts
4.4. Identifying potential bottlenecks
4.5. Sensitivity analysis
4.6. Capacity analysis exercises

5. RAN Capacity Solutions


5.1. Air interface solutions (channel
bandwidth, aggregation, etc.)
5.2. RAN solutions (cell splitting, small
cells, etc.)
5.3. Network solutions (load
balancing, admission control,
etc.)
5.4. Services and capacity trade-offs
(e.g. voice vs. data users)
5.5. Estimating costs vs. benefits
5.6. Capacity solutions exercises

Suggested Prerequisites
LTE Technology Overview (Instructor Led)
LTE RAN Signaling and Operations Certification (Instructor Led)

38

2015 Award
AwardSolutions,
Solutions,Inc.
Inc. www.awardsolutions.com
www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727
+1.972.664.0727
2015

v2.1

LTE RAN Signaling and Operations Certification


Instructor Led | Duration: 5 Days | Course Number: LTE_405

Long Term Evolution (LTE) is an all-IP wireless system that promises dramatic improvements in throughput and latency. The LTE enhancements are based on
several fundamental pillars: a new air interface (OFDM+MIMO), simplified network architecture and efficient air interface structure and signaling mechanisms.
This course takes a detailed look at various call scenarios of the LTE radio network using signaling messages and related parameters. It provides details of
system access, initial attach, default/dedicated bearer setup, handovers and inter-RAT operations. At appropriate instances, the LTE operations are compared
with similar operations of 1x/1xEV-DO or UMTS networks. This certification workshop utilizes several hands-on exercises, a drive-test tool, and concludes
with a certification assessment.

Course Outline

Intended Audience
This course is primarily intended for a technical audience in RF
engineering, systems engineering, network engineering, support,
operations, and anyone seeking a more in depth understanding of LTE
signaling details.

After completing this course, the student will be able to:


Sketch the network architecture of the LTE E-UTRAN and EPC
List and describe the use of DL and UL channels of LTE
Step through the system acquisition process in LTE and understand
the system selection parameters
Analyze the UE logs to get deeper understanding of system access
parameters of SIB 2
Step through the system access and the initial attach operation,
including security and IP address assignment
Explain the implementation and enforcement of QoS for calls such
as VoIP
Summarize traffic operations for UL and DL
Describe various handover scenarios and the associated signaling
procedures
Describe inter-system handover mechanisms, in particular the LTE
to 3G/2G scenario

LTE Overview (eLearning)


LTE Technology Overview (Instructor Led)

1.1. E-UTRAN architecture


1.2. LTE-Uu, S1 and X2 interfaces
1.3. Protocols of LTE RAN

2. LTE Air Interface

Learning Objectives

Suggested Prerequisites

1. LTE Network Architecture

2.1. LTE frame structure of DL and UL


2.2. LTE channels overview
2.3. Identities of UE, eNB and EPC

3. System Acquisition
3.1. Cell-ID detection and synchronization
3.2. System Information Blocks (SIBs)
3.3. RF configuration and operations
parameters

4. Connecting to LTE RAN


4.1. Random access operation
4.2. UE and eNB timing alignment
4.3. RRC connection setup

5. Attach to the Network


5.1.
5.2.
5.3.
5.4.

Authentication
Selection of MME, S-GW, and P-GW
Default bearer establishment
AS and NAS security

6. Quality Of Service in LTE


6.1.
6.2.
6.3.
6.4.

QoS parameters
Dedicated EPS bearers and TFTs
Dedicated bearer setup
Data radio bearers in LTE

2014
+1.972.664.0727
2015 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727

7. Traffic and Bandwidth Management


7.1.
7.2.
7.3.
7.4.
7.5.
7.6.
7.7.
7.8.

DL traffic processing
Feedback: CQI, PMI, RI
UL traffic processing
Buffer status reports
Scheduling
Time alignment
Closed loop power control
Discontinuous reception

8. Mobility and Idle Mode


8.1. Types of measurements
8.2. Cell reselection and TAU
operation
8.3. Paging operation
8.4. DRX operation in Idle mode

9. Handover
9.1.
9.2.
9.3.
9.4.
9.5.

Measurement configuration
Measurement types
Handovers
X2-based handovers
S1-based handovers

10. Interoperability
10.1. Comparison of measurements
between LTE and 2G/3G
10.2. Inter-RAT handover preparation
10.3. Inter-RAT handover execution

Certification Assessment

v1.10

39

LTE RAN Signaling and Operations: Part 1 - Attach


Instructor Led | Duration: 1.5 Days | Course Number: LTE_418

Long Term Evolution (LTE) is a radio technology based on OFDM and MIMO technologies. LTE provides much higher data rates (over 100 Mbps) to users while
reducing the cost-per-bit for service providers. This is very exciting to wireless operators who are eager to deploy multimedia rich Internet content over a
wireless medium with seamless access anywhere at any time. This course describes the detailed procedures using call flows and ladder diagrams the system
acquisition, RRC connection and steps through Network Attach procedure. In summary, this course provides a comprehensive overview of various procedures
of a UE while registering on an LTE network.

Intended Audience

Course Outline

This course provides a comprehensive overview and a technical


introduction to UE Attach procedure. It is suitable for engineers in network
planning and design, product design and development, network
deployment, network performance, and network operations.

Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to:
List the steps involved in initial system acquisition
Describe how the primary and secondary synchronization signals
are used
Identify the key channel configuration parameters received over the
broadcast channel
Illustrate the random access procedure
Explain the purpose of signaling radio bearers
Show the steps involved in establishing an RRC connection
Illustrate the end to end message flow for the Network Attach
procedure
Explain how MMEs/S-GW and P-GW are selected
Sketch the process for setting up a default EPS bearer
Describe IP address allocation
Outline the differences between the EMM state

Suggested Prerequisites
LTE Overview (eLearning)

40

1. System Acquisition
1.1. UE power-up sequence
1.2. Initial power-up parameters
1.3. Synchronization signals
1.4. System Information Block (SIB) types
1.5. MIB example
1.6. SIB1 example
1.7. Initial network selection
1.8. Initial cell selection
1.9. Review exercises
1.10. Summary

2. RRC Connection to LTE RAN


2.1. Access signaling - Random Access
procedure
2.2. SIB2 parameters
2.3. PRACH power calculation
2.4. Timers for PRACH probes
2.5. Preamble formats
2.6. Random access response
2.7. Contention resolution
2.8. RRC connection set up
2.9. Signaling radio bearers
2.10. Review exercises
2.11. Summary

2015 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com


www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727
+1.972.664.0727

3. LTE Network Attach Part1


3.1. Steps involved in LTE EPS bearer
set up
3.2. AS and NAS signaling
3.3. S1-MME set up
3.4. MME selection
3.5. LTE security features
3.6. UE authentication
3.7. NAS security set up
3.8. Exercises

4. LTE Network Attach Part 2


4.1. S6a signaling - update location
request
4.2. P-GW and S-GW selection
4.3. PDN connectivity service
4.4. AS security procedure
4.5. UE capabilities negotiation
4.6. Default bearer set up procedure
4.7. Non-access stratum states
4.8. Summary
4.9. Exercises

v1.0

LTE RAN Signaling and Operations: Part 2 Mobility, QoS, Traffic


Instructor Led | Duration: 1.5 Days | Course Number: LTE_419

Long Term Evolution (LTE) is a radio technology based on OFDM and MIMO technologies. LTE provides much higher data rates (over 100 Mbps) to users while
reducing the cost-per-bit for service providers. This is very exciting to wireless operators who are eager to deploy multimedia rich Internet content over a
wireless medium with seamless access anywhere at any time. This course describes how the UE selects and re-selects LTE cells in idle mode. It introduces
various events defined to trigger handovers in LTE Networks. Both Intra and Inter frequency LTE mobility is covered. It describes the LTE QoS model, QoS
parameters, PCC architecture, Uplink and Down Link traffic and band width management. It introduces the concepts of Service data flows and guaranteed
band width through dedicated EPS bearers. In summary, this course provides a comprehensive overview of LTE Mobility, QoS and traffic management.

Intended Audience

Course Outline

This course provides a comprehensive overview and a technical


introduction to mobility procedures, QoS and traffic/bandwidth
management in LTE. It is suitable for engineers in network planning and
design, product design and development, network deployment, network
performance, and network operations.

Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to:
Describe the architectural components of Idle mode and paging
Describe the system information messages necessary for cell reselection procedure
Explain how measurement reports are configured and used to
trigger handovers
Describe the mobility procedures for inter eNB and inter S-GW
handovers
Illustrate the inter-MME handover procedure
Define Service Data Flows and show how they relate to EPS bearers
Describe the Quality of Service ( QoS) model and architecture
Explain the roles of eNB and P-GW in managing the QoS using TFTs
in mapping IP flows
Identify the feedback mechanisms used over LTE air interface
Summarize the changes involved in supporting multiple antennas
Illustrate how Timing Alignment, Power Control and Discontinuous
Reception (DRX) are managed

Suggested Prerequisites

1. LTE Mobility Idle Mode


1.1.
1.2.
1.3.
1.4.

Review of LTE network architecture


Definition of Idle mode
S1 release procedures
System Information messages for
cell re-selection procedure
1.5. Cell reselection (Intra and Inter
frequency)
1.6. Tracking area update procedure
1.7. Paging in LTE
1.8. DRX mode in LTE
1.9. Service request procedure in LTE
1.10. Exercises

2. LTE Mobility Connected Mode


2.1.
2.2.
2.3.
2.4.

Basics of LTE measurements


Handover events in LTE
LTE handover phases
Measurement by UE and reporting
procedures
2.5. Handover decision
2.6. X2 based handover procedures
2.7. S1 based handover procedures
2.8. Inter MME handover procedures
2.9. Summary
2.10. Exercises

LTE Overview (eLearning)


2015
2015 Award
AwardSolutions,
Solutions,Inc.
Inc. www.awardsolutions.com
www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727
+1.972.664.0727

3. Quality of Service in LTE


3.1.
3.2.
3.3.
3.4.
3.5.
3.6.

Review of EPS bearer set up


LTE QoS model
QoS parameters in LTE
Concept of dedicated bearer
QoS architecture - PCC functions
Online and offline charging
models
3.7. Dedicated bearer establishment
procedure using Gx and Rx
interfaces
3.8. End-to-end traffic flow in LTE
3.9. QoS enforcement in LTE
3.10. Exercises

4. Traffic and Bandwidth Management


4.1. Downlink traffic processing
4.2. CQI reporting procedures, CQI
table
4.3. PMI for MIMO techniques
4.4. RI for MIMO techniques
4.5. Uplink traffic processing
4.6. Buffer status reporting (types)
4.7. Semi persistent and dynamic
scheduling
4.8. Timing Alignment timer
4.9. Power Control in LTE
4.10. DRX procedures and parameters
4.11. Summary
4.12. Exercises

v1.0

41

LTE RAN Signaling and Operations: Part 3 - Interworking (GSM/UMTS)


Instructor Led | Duration: 1.5 Days | Course Number: LTE_420

The major focus of this course is the interworking between UMTS/HSPA and LTE and begins with a brief overview of LTE and 3GPP 2G/3G network
architectures and requirements for interworking. The building blocks that support interworking between LTE and UMTS/HSPA are discussed in detail, including
the new interfaces, hybrid device capabilities, and radio/core network mechanisms. Different interworking/mobility scenarios are listed and detailed message
flows are given. The course also previews IP mobility mechanisms, security, and QoS considerations. The course provides both the architectural features and
the detailed message flows of the interworking between LTE and 3GPP 2G/3G. In summary, this course provides a comprehensive overview of LTE technology
Interworking with other 3GPP networks.

Intended Audience

Course Outline

This course provides a comprehensive overview and a technical


introduction to LTE Interworking with 3GPP networks. It is suitable for
engineers in network planning and design, product design and
development, network deployment, network performance, and network
operations.

Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to:
Analyze the key differences between UMTS and LTE architecture
Explain the two architectural options for interworking with 3G/2G
networks
Sketch the network interfaces and protocols used for interworking
Explain the measurement procedure as it applies to Inter RAT
handover
List the measurement events for E-UTRAN, UTRAN and GERAN
Examine the detailed call flows for the inter-RAT procedures
between LTE and UMTS/GPRS
Describe Idle mode activities in LTE, UMTS and GSM/GPRS
Illustrate the details of the inter-RAT cell reselection procedure
List key broadcast information parameters needed for idle-mode
cell reselection in all 3 RATs
Walk through Tracking area update procedures
Explain the combined TA/LA update procedures

Suggested Prerequisites

1. LTE Mobility - Interworking with 3GPP


1.1.
1.2.
1.3.
1.4.
1.5.
1.6.

LTE interworking network architecture


Definition of interoperability
Rel-8 UMTS access using S4-SGSN
IRAT measurements in LTE
Events A1 to A5 and B1, B2
IRAT measurements in UMTS and
GPRS
1.7. UMTS compressed mode and Idle
frames in GPRS
1.8. Review exercises
1.9. Summary

2. LTE Mobility - Connected Mode


Interworking
2.1. UMTS to LTE handover procedures
2.2. Handover preparation, execution and
completion phases
2.3. LTE to UMTS handover procedures
2.4. Exercises
2.5. Pre Rel-8 UMTS access
2.6. Gn-SGSN based handovers between
UMTS to LTE
2.7. Summary
2.8. Exercises

3. LTE Mobility - Idle Mode


Interworking
3.1. Device states and IRAT mobility
procedures
3.2. Idle mode activities
3.3. EGPRS and UTRA states
3.4. System Information for IRAT
procedures
3.5. IRAT cell selection
3.6. IRAT cell reselection
3.7. Tracking area update procedure
3.8. Paging procedure
3.9. Combined LA and TA updates
3.10. Summary
3.11. Exercises

LTE Overview (eLearning)

42

2015 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com


www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727
+1.972.664.0727

v1.0

RF Design Workshop: Part 1 - LTE

Instructor Led | Duration: 2 Days | Course Number: LTE_415


LTE offers significant improvements over previous mobile wireless systems in terms of data speeds and capacity, through the use of technologies such as
OFDMA and multiple antenna techniques. However, these gains are realized only with careful planning and design in the LTE Radio Access Network (RAN), to
maximize the efficiency of available RF spectrum. This hands-on workshop guides participants through the theory and practice of RF design for LTE RANs.
Participants will apply their understanding of the LTE air interface physical structure and related concepts to calculate the link budgets to support the market
coverage and performance requirements. Participants will use coverage prediction tool for exercises to apply their knowledge and skills to real-world
scenarios.

Intended Audience

Course Outline

This workshop is intended for LTE RF design and system performance


engineers.

Learning Objectives
After completing this workshop, the student will be able to:
Apply a consistent process to radio network design
Use RSRP and RSRQ measurements to assess LTE RAN RF
performance
Map network requirements to corresponding system parameters
Construct uplink/downlink link budgets to meet specific
performance requirements
Use coverage and capacity requirements to determine the optimal
radio network design
Exploit multiple antenna techniques to optimize coverage and
performance

Required Equipment
PC laptop with administrator privileges

Suggested Prerequisites

1. Overview of LTE Radio Network Design


1.1. Radio network design goals
1.2. Planning inputs and outputs
1.3. LTE RAN planning process

2. LTE Air Interface


2.1.
2.2.
2.3.
2.4.
2.5.

E-UTRAN architecture
LTE Physical layer structure
Air interface resources
UE measurements (RSRP/RSRQ)
RSRP/RSRQ exercises

3. Market and Engineering Requirements


3.1.
3.2.
3.3.
3.4.

5. RF Design and Site Selection


5.1.
5.2.
5.3.
5.4.
5.5.

RF design process and options


Morphology definitions
Propagation models
RF design tool configuration
Coverage prediction

6. Antennas in LTE Networks


6.1.
6.2.
6.3.
6.4.

Multiple antenna techniques


Downlink feedback (CQI/RI/PMI)
Deployment considerations
Coverage prediction exercises

Coverage requirements
Capacity requirements
QoS requirements
Engineering requirements

4. LTE Link Budget


4.1.
4.2.
4.3.
4.4.

Cell edge throughput calculations


Link budget for UL and DL
Role of RRH and TMA
UL/DL link budget exercises

Overview of OFDM (eLearning)


LTE Overview (eLearning)

2015 Award
AwardSolutions,
Solutions,Inc.
Inc. www.awardsolutions.com
www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727
+1.972.664.0727
2015

v1.0

43

RF Design Workshop: Part 2 VoLTE and Small Cells


Instructor Led | Duration: 2 Days | Course Number: LTE_416

With the expected introduction of LTE features such as Voice over LTE (VoLTE), multi-frequency, Small cell deployment, and LTE-Advanced features such as
carrier aggregation, the existing RF design process needs to be enhanced. This workshop provides a foundation for the features such as VoLTE, carrier
aggregation, Heterogeneous Networks (HetNets), and small cells. The course revisits the data traffic driven link budget and enhances to reflect the VoLTE
performance requirements and the differences for Small cells. The antennas being planned to accommodate multi-band deployments are discussed. Various
RF parameters related to cell selection/re-selection and handover are discussed for proper load distribution in cases of multi-carrier and small cell
deployment. In summary, this workshop provides detailed understanding of RF design enhancements for VoLTE, LTE-Advanced and Small Cell.

Course Outline

Intended Audience
This workshop provides practical examples and intertwines the exercises
at every stage of the RF design process and is intended for RF designers,
RF systems engineers, network engineers, deployment and operations
personnel.

1. LTE Radio Network Design Review

Learning Objectives

2. Link Budget for Small Cells

After completing this workshop, the student will be able to:


Enumerate design considerations of deploying LTE in different
bands, for different services, and using different cell types
Identify the key features of LTE-Advanced such as Carrier
Aggregation, HetNet, eICIC, and SON and their impact on RF design
Step through the link budget and planning process for VoLTE, multifrequency, and Small cell deployment
Sketch various antenna configurations
Calculate the air interface capacity needs for data and VoLTE traffic
Describe configurations of RF design parameters related to cell
selection, re-selection, and handover

2.1. Review LTE link budget for macro


network
2.2. Small Cell considerations
2.3. Impact of Tx power, frequency, # of
antennas
2.4. Pathloss for UL and DL
2.5. Exercise: Link budget walk-through

5.1. Multi-band antenna


considerations
5.2. 4x4 MIMO considerations
5.3. TMA and RRH deployment
configurations
5.4. Integrated antenna considerations

6. Advanced Features of LTE


6.1. Carrier aggregation
6.2. HetNet and eICIC support
6.3. SON features

3. RF Design Considerations
3.1.
3.2.
3.3.
3.4.

RF design guidelines
RF design tool configuration
Coverage prediction
Exercises: Coverage and interference

4. Link Budget for VoLTE

Required Equipment
PC laptop with administrator privileges

Suggested Prerequisites
Overview of OFDM (eLearning)
LTE Overview (eLearning)
RF Design Workshop: Part 1 LTE (Instructor Led)

44

1.1. Radio network design goals, inputs


and outputs
1.2. LTE radio network planning process

5. Antenna Considerations

4.1. Link budget differences for VoLTE


and data
4.2. SINR requirement for VoLTE
4.3. Use of RBs for VoLTE
4.4. Pathloss for UL and DL
4.5. Exercise: Link budget walk-through

2015 Award
AwardSolutions,
Solutions,Inc.
Inc. www.awardsolutions.com
www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727
+1.972.664.0727
2015

v1.0

LTE RF Optimization Certification Workshop (UE Based)


Instructor Led | Duration: 5 Days | Course Number: LTE_412

This workshop provides insights into the symptoms and possible causes of field performance issues in LTE radio networks using UE logs. RF measurements
related to coverage and interference are discussed to analyze coverage holes and overlapping regions. Students analyze LTE signaling messages through UE
logs and map them to success and failure events along with performing root cause analysis and gain an in-depth understanding of these signaling events to
network performance. LTE RF optimization areas such as RRC connection setup, bearer drops, Intra-LTE and IRAT handover operation, downlink and uplink
throughput are addressed This knowledge transfer is obtained through hands-on experience using UE based diagnostic tools and scanner tools.
Note: This workshop uses UE logs and scanner data for analysis and concludes with a certification assessment.

Intended Audience

Workshop Outline

This workshop is primarily intended for RF and systems performance


engineers involved in LTE design, performance, and optimization.

Learning Objectives
After completing this workshop, the student will be able to:
Define the LTE RF KPIs and map them to RAN counters
Identify various LTE signaling events that map to success and
failure operational counters
Identify the RF measurements that are key to coverage and
interference and analyze them through post processing tools
Analyze UE logs for root cause analysis of successful and failure
events and map these events to operational counters and
corresponding KPIs
Accessibility and RRC connection and bearer setup
Intra LTE handovers and
Inter-RAT handovers
Radio link failures and bearer drops
Downlink and uplink throughput

Required Equipment
PC laptop

Suggested Prerequisites
LTE RAN Signaling and Operations (Instructor Led)

Special Note
This is an advanced level course. Please DO NOT register for this course if
you are not very familiar with LTE RAN Signaling.

1. Workshop Overview
2. LTE RAN KPIs
2.1. LTE RAN KPIs
2.2. LTE signaling to KPI mapping

3. Coverage Analysis
3.1.
3.2.
3.3.
3.4.

Defining the right coverage


RSRP, RSRQ, SINR plot analysis
Scanner data analysis
Coverage analysis using post
processing tool

4. Accessibility KPI Analysis


4.1. PRACH parameter analysis
4.2. Default bearer setup analysis
4.3. Radio bearer setup and RRC
reconfiguration
4.4. Call flow to generic counter mapping

5. Intra-LTE Handover Analysis


5.1. Intra and Inter-frequency handover
events and trigger parameters
5.2. Handover KPIs/counters
5.3. Handover execution: success and
failure scenario

6. Inter-RAT Handover
6.1. Idle mode system reselection
6.2. Inter-RAT handover events and
related trigger parameters

2015 Award
AwardSolutions,
Solutions,Inc.
Inc. www.awardsolutions.com
www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727
+1.972.664.0727
2015

6.3. Inter-RAT handover message flow


and related KPIs/generic counters
6.4. Handover execution: success and
failure scenario

7. Connection Drop Analysis


7.1.
7.2.
7.3.
7.4.

Radio link failure


UE context drops
E-RAB drops
Drop KPIs and troubleshooting

8. DL Data Traffic Performance


8.1.
8.2.
8.3.
8.4.

DL traffic operation walk-through


DL traffic KPIs
Analysis of CQI, PMI, RI
HARQ/ARQ and BLER analysis

9. UL Data Traffic Performance


9.1.
9.2.
9.3.
9.4.

UL traffic operation walk-through


UL traffic KPIs
UL power control parameters
HARQ/ARQ and BLER analysis

10. Idle Mode Performance


10.1. Bearer inactivity timer
10.2. Paging procedure optimization
10.3. TAU procedure optimization

Certification Assessment

v1.1

45

LTE RF Optimization: Part 1 Coverage and Accessibility


Instructor Led | Duration: 1.5 Days | Course Number: LTE_421

This workshop provides insights into the symptoms and possible causes of field performance issues in LTE radio networks using UE logs. RF measurements
related to coverage and interference are discussed to analyze coverage holes and overlapping regions. Students analyze LTE signaling messages through UE
logs and map them to success and failure events. Students perform root cause analysis and gain an in-depth understanding of these signaling events to
network performance. LTE RF optimization areas such as RRC connection setup, bearer drops, coverage issues. This knowledge transfer is obtained through
hands-on experience using UE based diagnostic tools and scanner tools.

Intended Audience

This workshop is primarily intended for RF and systems performance


engineers involved in LTE design, performance, and optimization.

Learning Objectives

After completing this workshop, the student will be able to:


Define the LTE RF KPIs and map them to RAN counters
Identify various LTE signaling events that map to success and
failure operational counters
Identify the RF measurements that are key to coverage and
interference and analyze them through post processing tools
Analyze UE logs for root cause analysis of successful and failure
events and map these events to operational counters and
corresponding KPIs
Accessibility and RRC connection and bearer setup
Radio link failures and bearer drops

Required Equipment
PC laptop

Suggested Prerequisites
LTE RAN Signaling and Operations: Part 1 Attach (Instructor Led)
LTE RAN Signaling and Operations: Part 2 Mobility, QoS, Traffic
(Instructor Led)
LTE RAN Signaling and Operations: Part 3 - Interworking
(GSM/UMTS) (Instructor Led)

Workshop Outline
1. Workshop Overview
2. LTE RAN KPIs
2.1.
2.2.
2.3.
2.4.

LTE RAN KPIs


LTE signaling to KPI mapping
Summary
Review exercises

3. Coverage Analysis

5. Connection Drop Analysis


5.1.
5.2.
5.3.
5.4.
5.5.
5.6.

Radio link failure


UE context drops
E-RAB drops
Drop KPIs and troubleshooting
Summary
Review exercises

3.1.
3.2.
3.3.
3.4.

Defining the right coverage


RSRP, RSRQ, SINR plot analysis
Scanner data analysis
Coverage analysis using post
processing tool
3.5. Summary
3.6. Review exercises

4. Accessibility KPI Analysis


4.1. PRACH parameter analysis
4.2. Default bearer setup analysis
4.3. Radio bearer setup and RRC
reconfiguration
4.4. Call flow to generic counter mapping
4.5. Summary
4.6. Review exercises

Special Note
This is an advanced level course. Please DO NOT register for this course if you are not
very familiar with LTE RAN Signaling.

46

2015 Award
AwardSolutions,
Solutions,Inc.
Inc. www.awardsolutions.com
www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727
+1.972.664.0727
2015

v1.0

LTE RF Optimization: Part 2 Downlink and Uplink Throughput


Instructor Led | Duration: 1.5 Days | Course Number: LTE_422

This workshop provides insights into the symptoms and possible causes of field performance issues in LTE radio networks using UE logs. RF measurements
related to coverage and interference are discussed to analyze coverage holes and overlapping regions. Students analyze LTE signaling messages through UE
logs and map them to success and failure events. Students perform root cause analysis and gain an in-depth understanding of these signaling events to
network performance. LTE RF optimization areas such as downlink and uplink throughput analysis are addressed. This knowledge transfer is obtained through
hands-on experience using UE based diagnostic tools and scanner tools.

Intended Audience

This workshop is primarily intended for RF and systems performance


engineers involved in LTE design, performance, and optimization.

Learning Objectives

After completing this workshop, the student will be able to:


Define the LTE RF KPIs and map them to RAN counters
Identify various LTE signaling events that map to success and
failure operational counters
Identify the RF measurements that are key to coverage and
interference and analyze them through post processing tools
Analyze UE logs for root cause analysis of successful and failure
events and map these events to operational counters and
corresponding KPIs
Understand LTE KPIs where they are pegged
Describe DL and UL bandwidth and UE throughput
Downlink and Uplink throughput issues

Required Equipment
PC laptop

Suggested Prerequisites

LTE RAN Signaling and Operations: Part 1 Attach (Instructor Led)


LTE RAN Signaling and Operations: Part 2 Mobility, QoS, Traffic
(Instructor Led)
LTE RAN Signaling and Operations: Part 3 - Interworking
(GSM/UMTS) (Instructor Led)

Workshop Outline

1. Workshop Overview
2. LTE RAN KPIs
2.1.
2.2.
2.3.
2.4.

LTE RAN KPIs


LTE signaling to KPI mapping
Summary
Review exercise

3. DL Data Traffic Performance


3.1.
3.2.
3.3.
3.4.
3.5.
3.6.

DL traffic operation walk-through


DL traffic KPIs
Analysis of CQI, PMI, RI
HARQ/ARQ and BLER analysis
Summary
Review exercises

4. UL Data Traffic Performance


4.1.
4.2.
4.3.
4.4.
4.5.
4.6.

UL traffic operation walk-through


UL traffic KPIs
UL power control parameters
HARQ/ARQ and BLER analysis
Summary
Review exercises

Special Note
This is an advanced level course. Please DO NOT register for this course if you are not
very familiar with LTE RAN Signaling.
2015 Award
AwardSolutions,
Solutions,Inc.
Inc. www.awardsolutions.com
www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727
+1.972.664.0727
2015

v1.0

47

LTE RF Optimization: Part 3 Mobility and Inter-RAT


Instructor Led | Duration: 1.5 Days | Course Number: LTE_423

This workshop provides insights into the symptoms and possible causes of field performance issues in LTE radio networks using UE logs. RF measurements
related to coverage and interference are discussed to analyze coverage holes and overlapping regions. Students analyze LTE signaling messages through UE
logs and map them to success and failure events. Students perform root cause analysis and gain an in-depth understanding of these signaling events to
network performance. LTE RF optimization areas such as Intra-LTE and IRAT handover operation. This knowledge transfer is obtained through hands-on
experience using UE based diagnostic tools and scanner tools.

Intended Audience

This workshop is primarily intended for RF and systems performance


engineers involved in LTE design, performance, and optimization.

Learning Objectives

After completing this workshop, the student will be able to:


Define the LTE RF KPIs and map them to RAN counters
Identify various LTE signaling events that map to success and
failure operational counters
Identify the RF measurements that are key to coverage and
interference and analyze them through post processing tools
Analyze UE logs for root cause analysis of successful and failure
events and map these events to operational counters and
corresponding KPIs
Intra LTE handovers and
Inter-RAT handovers

Required Equipment
PC laptop

Suggested Prerequisites

LTE RAN Signaling and Operations: Part 1 Attach (Instructor Led)


LTE RAN Signaling and Operations: Part 2 Mobility, QoS, Traffic
(Instructor Led)
LTE RAN Signaling and Operations: Part 3 - Interworking
(GSM/UMTS) (Instructor Led)

Special Note
This is an advanced level course. Please DO NOT register for this course if you are not
very familiar with LTE RAN Signaling.

48

Workshop Outline

1. Workshop Overview
2. Intra-LTE Handover Analysis
2.1. Intra and Inter-frequency handover
events and trigger parameters
2.2. Handover KPIs/counters
2.3. Handover execution: success and
failure scenario
2.4. Summary
2.5. Review exercises

3. Inter-RAT Handover
3.1. Idle mode system reselection
3.2. Inter-RAT handover events and
related trigger parameters
3.3. Inter-RAT handover message flow
and related KPIs/generic counters
3.4. Handover execution: success and
failure scenario
3.5. Summary
3.6. Review exercises

4. Idle Mode Performance


4.1.
4.2.
4.3.
4.4.
4.5.

Bearer inactivity timer


Paging procedure optimization
TAU procedure optimization
Summary
Review exercises

2015
2015 Award
AwardSolutions,
Solutions,Inc.
Inc. www.awardsolutions.com
www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727
+1.972.664.0727

v1.0

Small Cell Technical Overview

Instructor Led | Duration: 2 Days | Course Number: TRND206


Wireless data traffic has doubled every year for the last several years, and this trend is expected to continue for years to come. In order to cope with this
exponential increase in demand, wireless service providers are augmenting their macro cellular networks with heterogeneous networks (HetNets), deploying
small cell solutions to increase both coverage and capacity for their public, residential and enterprise subscribers. This course provides a technical overview of
the new HetNet paradigm, highlighting the challenges, opportunities and solutions service providers have with respect to small cells. These include
deployment considerations, network configuration and management, interactions with macrocell networks, and performance optimization, in order to deliver
improved service to the subscribers, while at the same time minimizing equipment and operational costs.

Intended Audience

Course Outline

This course is intended for those in engineering functions related to small


cells, as well as those who are involved in small cell planning, design, and
deployment.

Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to:
Define small cells and describe their market drivers
Sketch the small cell network architecture and describe the physical
and logical interworking between small cells and macrocells
Identify the key challenges and available solutions for deploying
small cells in indoor and outdoor locations
Discuss the key technologies available to enable the deployment of
small cells within existing macrocell networks
List the key enabling technologies that optimize small cell
performance and automate network management functions
Describe how other coverage and capacity solutions can
complement small cells, including DAS, D-RAN, C-RAN, and Wi-Fi
hotspots

Suggested Prerequisites
Good understanding of communications principles

1. Introduction to Small Cells


1.1. What is a Small Cell?
1.2. Market drivers
1.3. Small cell ecosystem

2. Small Cell Network Architecture


2.1.
2.2.
2.3.
2.4.
2.5.

Small cell network functions


OA&M architecture
Security requirements
Home eNBs
Core network offloading

3. Small Cell Deployments


3.1.
3.2.
3.3.
3.4.

Indoor applications
Outdoor applications
Deployment considerations
Backhaul options

4. Small Cell Technologies


4.1.
4.2.
4.3.
4.4.
4.5.

5. Small Cells and SON


5.1. Self-Organizing Networks
5.2. Auto-configuration
5.3. Automatic Neighbor Relations
(ANR)
5.4. Automatic PCI configuration
5.5. Cell selection and reselection
5.6. Handovers
5.7. Energy Saving Management
(ESM)

6. Other Wireless Solutions


6.1. Distributed Antenna Systems
(DAS)
6.2. D-RAN and C-RAN
6.3. Wi-Fi and LTE
6.4. Network offloading

Small cell frequency assignments


Interference management (ICIC, etc.)
Small cells and Carrier Aggregation
Small cells and CoMP
HetNets

2015 Award
AwardSolutions,
Solutions,Inc.
Inc. www.awardsolutions.com
www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727
+1.972.664.0727
2015

v2.0

49

Small Cell RF Planning Workshop

Instructor Led | Duration: 2 Days | Course Number: LTE_208


With the introduction of LTE features such as Voice over LTE (VoLTE), multi-frequency, small cells, and LTE-Advanced features such as carrier aggregation, the
current LTE RF design process needs to be enhanced. This workshop focuses specifically on the special requirements and considerations for small cells
deployed in an outdoor environment. The course revisits data traffic driven link budgets and enhances them to reflect the differences for small cell
deployments. RF planning and design tools are used to predict the potential impact of small cells on the surrounding macrocell network. Finally, important
considerations for setting small cell parameters for optimum performance are discussed, Throughout the workshop, students are given the opportunity to
apply their knowledge in a simulated network through a series of hands-on exercises.

Course Outline

Intended Audience
This workshop provides practical examples and intertwines the exercises
at every stage of the RF planning and design process. The course is
primarily intended for RF designers, RF systems engineers, network
engineers, and deployment and operations personnel.

1. LTE Radio Network Design

Learning Objectives

2. Link Budget for Small Cells

After completing this workshop, the student will be able to:


Identify the key design considerations of deploying LTE small cells
within an outdoor macrocell environment
Derive link budgets for typical small cell deployments
Use RF planning and design tools to assess the impact of small cells
on the surrounding network
Determine the special RF design parameter settings required for
optimum cell selection, re-selection, and handover operations in
small cells

Required Equipment
PC laptop with administrator privileges

1.1. Radio network design goals, inputs


and outputs
1.2. LTE radio network planning process
2.1. Review LTE link budget for macro
network
2.2. Small Cell considerations
2.3. Impact of Tx power, frequency, # of
antennas
2.4. Pathloss for UL and DL
2.5. Exercise: Link budget walk-through

3. RF Design Considerations
3.1.
3.2.
3.3.
3.4.

RF design guidelines
RF design tool configuration
Coverage prediction
Exercises: Coverage and interference

4. Small Cell Parameter Configuration

Suggested Prerequisites
LTE RF Planning and Design Certification Workshop (Instructor Led)

4.1.
4.2.
4.3.
4.4.

PCI planning
Neighbor list planning
RA Preamble planning
Cell selection/reselection
parameters
4.5. Handover parameters

Assessment

50

2015 Award
AwardSolutions,
Solutions,Inc.
Inc. www.awardsolutions.com
www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727
+1.972.664.0727
2015

v1.0

Small Cells and VoLTE RF Planning and Design Certification Workshop


Instructor Led | Duration: 4 Days | Course Number: LTE_413

With the expected introduction of LTE features such as Voice over LTE (VoLTE), multi-frequency, Small cell deployment, and LTE-Advanced features such as
carrier aggregation, the existing RF design process needs to be enhanced. This workshop provides a foundation for the features such as VoLTE, carrier
aggregation, Heterogeneous Networks (HetNets), and small cells. The course revisits the data traffic driven link budget and enhances to reflect the VoLTE
performance requirements and the differences for Small cells. The antennas being planned to accommodate multi-band deployments are discussed. Various
RF parameters related to cell selection/re-selection and handover are discussed for proper load distribution in cases of multi-carrier and small cell
deployment. In summary, this workshop provides detailed understanding of RF design enhancements for VoLTE, LTE-Advanced and Small Cell.

Course Outline

Intended Audience
This workshop provides practical examples and intertwines the exercises
at every stage of the RF planning and design process and is intended for
RF designers, RF systems engineers, network engineers, deployment and
operations personnel.

1. LTE Radio Network Design


1.1. Radio network design goals, inputs
and outputs
1.2. LTE radio network planning process

2. Link Budget for Small Cells

Learning Objectives
After completing this workshop, the student will be able to:
Enumerate design considerations of deploying LTE in different
bands, for different services, and using different cell types
Identify the key features of LTE-Advanced such as Carrier
Aggregation, HetNet, eICIC, and SON and their impact on RF design
Step through the link budget and planning process for VoLTE, multifrequency, and Small cell deployment
Sketch various antenna configurations
Calculate the air interface capacity needs for data and VoLTE traffic
Describe configurations of RF design parameters related to cell
selection, re-selection, and handover

Required Equipment
PC laptop with administrator privileges

Suggested Prerequisites
LTE RF Planning and Design Certification Workshop (Instructor Led)

2.1. Review LTE link budget for macro


network
2.2. Small Cell considerations
2.3. Impact of Tx power, frequency, # of
antennas
2.4. Pathloss for UL and DL
2.5. Exercise: Link budget walk-through

3. RF Design Considerations
3.1.
3.2.
3.3.
3.4.

RF design guidelines
RF design tool configuration
Coverage prediction
Exercises: Coverage and interference

4. Link Budget for VoLTE


4.1. Link budget differences for VoLTE
and data
4.2. SINR requirement for VoLTE
4.3. Use of RBs for VoLTE
4.4. Pathloss for UL and DL
4.5. Exercise: Link budget walk-through

2015 Award
AwardSolutions,
Solutions,Inc.
Inc. www.awardsolutions.com
www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727
+1.972.664.0727
2015

5. Antenna Considerations
5.1. Multi-band antenna
considerations
5.2. 4x4 MIMO considerations
5.3. TMA and RRH deployment
configurations
5.4. Integrated antenna considerations

6. LTE Capacity Planning


6.1. Data and VoLTE traffic modeling
6.2. Air interface capacity planning
6.3. Benefits of carrier aggregation

7. Small Cell Parameter Configuration


7.1.
7.2.
7.3.
7.4.

PCI planning
Neighbor list planning
RA Preamble planning
Cell selection/reselection
parameters
7.5. Handover parameters

8. Advanced Features of LTE


8.1. Carrier aggregation
8.2. HetNet and eICIC support
8.3. SON features

Certification Assessment

v1.0

51

DAS Technical Overview

Instructor Led | Duration: 2 Days | Course Number: TRND205


Distributed Antenna System (DAS) is an integral part of the operators strategy to support coverage and capacity needs of explosive wireless broadband data
demand. Wireless data usage is increasingly becoming an indoor phenomenon with subscribers using their mobile devices not only as a productivity device
but also as an entertainment hub, which puts a lot of stress on network design. The macro network must be supplemented with a robust indoor network to
cater to this ever increasing demand for wireless bandwidth. This course describes different solutions for Distributed Antenna Systems. The course covers
types of DAS, commonly used DAS equipment, DAS design considerations, link budget, and operational parameter planning. In summary, this course provides
a technical overview of DAS and its deployment considerations.

Course Outline

Intended Audience
This course provides a comprehensive overview and a technical
introduction to DAS and is intended for those in engineering functions as
well as those who are involved in planning, design, and deployment.

Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to:
List the various types of DAS such as i-DAS and o-DAS
Describe the market drivers for DAS deployment
Determine the types of DAS for a given coverage and capacity
requirements
Identify the various equipment used in deploying DAS
Identify the key RF measurements and design targets of LTE
Prepare a DAS link budget
List the LTE DAS configuration parameters
Identify the factors that may impact DAS performance

Suggested Prerequisites
Good understanding of communications principles

1. DAS What and Why?


1.1.
1.2.
1.3.
1.4.

What is DAS?
The market drivers for DAS
Types of DAS
DAS, Small Cells, and WiFi hotspots

2. DAS Technology Overview


2.1.
2.2.
2.3.
2.4.
2.5.
2.6.
2.7.

Coverage requirements
Capacity improvement needs
Improving QoE
Need for RF isolation
Timing requirements
Co-existence with macro network
MIMO for DAS

3. DAS Architecture
3.1.
3.2.
3.3.
3.4.

BTS hotel
Active DAS components
Passive DAS components
DAS antennas

6. DAS Planning Considerations


6.1. Capacity
6.2. Coverage
6.3. Overview of iBWave

7. Configuring DAS
7.1. PCI, DL/UL RS, and RACH
configurations
7.2. Interference coordination
7.3. Handover coordination
7.4. Large venue parameters

8. DAS Optimization
8.1.
8.2.
8.3.
8.4.

UL interference issues
DL throughput issues
Optimizing DAS MIMO performance
Common hardware issues

4. DAS Design Considerations


4.1.
4.2.
4.3.
4.4.
4.5.

DAS design guidelines


Site survey and walk test
Macro site considerations
Neutral host DAS
Multi-technology deployment

5. LTE Essentials for DAS


5.1. DL and UL channels in LTE
5.2. LTE measurements: RSRP, SINR

52

2015 Award
AwardSolutions,
Solutions,Inc.
Inc. www.awardsolutions.com
www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727
+1.972.664.0727
2015

v1.0

IP Convergence & IMS


Award Solutions IP Convergence & IMS curriculum focuses on advanced technologies by providing a suite of courses to help prepare individuals for
designing, deploying and optimizing tomorrows networks. Our courses provide end-to-end coverage of the technologies and explain how they are
deployed in different wireless networks. One of the key changes in communication networks is an evolution toward All-IP-based core networks where
both voice and data services are provided by one consolidated network. Operators will be able to provide voice, video and data services with a single
unified core network. There are many benefits to converged IP networks and as every communication network moves to IP-based networks, seamless
mobility can be achieved by moving to All-IP-based networks.
SELF-PACED eLEARNING COURSES

[IPC_103] Welcome to IP Networking (e)


[IPC_104] IP Convergence Overview (e)
[IPC_106] Overview of MPLS (e)
[IPC_107] Overview of IMS (e)
[IPC_108] Voice and Video over IP (VoIP) Overview (e)
[IPC_109] IP Quality of Service (QoS) (e)
[IPC_110] Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) (e)
[IPC_114] IP Basics (e)
[IPC_113] IP Routing (e)
[IPC_115] QoS in IP Networks (e)
[IPC_117] TCP and Transport Layer Protocols (e)
[IPC_119] Ethernet Basics (e)
[IPC_118] Ethernet VLANs (e)
[IPC_116] Ethernet Bridging (e)
[IPC_122] Ethernet Backhaul Overview (e)
[IPC_120] Interconnecting IP Networks (e)
[IPC_121] Welcome to IPv6 (e)

INSTRUCTOR LED COURSES

[IPC_101] IP Convergence Essentials


[IPC_203] Exploring MPLS
[IPC_204] Exploring IMS (R8)
SIP and Diameter for IMS/VoLTE
[IPC_211] Exploring TCP/IP Protocols
[IPC_102] Ethernet Backhaul Essentials
[IPC_205] Exploring Ethernet Backhaul
[IPC_301] Ethernet Backhaul Planning
[IPC_405] IP Networking Workshop for LTE
[IPC_406] IP Networking Workshop for 4G Backhaul
[IPC_207] Exploring IP Routing and Ethernet Bridging
[IPC_407] IP Routing and Ethernet Bridging Workshop
[IPC_202] Exploring IPv6
[IPC_409] IPv6 Networking Workshop for LTE Networks

Exploring IP Routing and Ethernet Bridging Instructor Led Course

2015 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727

53

Welcome to IP Networking

eLearning | Average Duration: 3 hours | Course Number: IPC_103


As the wireless industry transitions to 3G and 4G wireless networks supporting higher rate packet data services, a solid understanding of IP networking is
essential. IP is to data transfer as a dial tone is to a wireline telephone. A fundamental knowledge of IPv4 and IPv6 networking along with use of VLANs is a
must for all wireless professionals. Starting with an introduction to IP networking services such as the web, email and VPN to illustrate the value and ubiquity
of IP networks, the course then describes the IP network architecture, the functions provided by various components and the role of key protocols. This course
provides an introduction to IPv6 features, its interworking with IPv4, and techniques to migrate to IPv6 and concludes with a discussion of how
GPRS/UMTS/LTE and 1x/1xEV networks take advantage of IP networks when providing mobile web access.

Intended Audience

Knowledge Knuggets

This course is intended for those seeking an introduction to IP Networking


and how it is used in wireless networks.

Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to:

List the applications that use IP networks


Sketch the Internet architecture
Distinguish between Internet, intranet, extranet and IP networks
List the key characteristics of IP networks and different types of IP
addresses
Identify the limitations of IPv4, and key features and benefits of IPv6
Name the key protocols used in IP networks
Explain how IP packets are routed from point A to point B
Describe security in IP networks
Describe the use of IP networking in 3G/4G wireless networks

1. Applications in IP Networks
1.1.
1.2.
1.3.
1.4.
1.5.
1.6.

Email
Web browsing
IP telephony
Internet, Intranet, Extranet
VPN
Value of using IP

2. IP Network Architecture
2.1.
2.2.
2.3.
2.4.

Architecture of the Internet


WANs, MANs, LANs and VLANs
Functions of IP router
IP protocol layers

5. Internet Security
5.1. Security threats
5.2. Key security technologies: IPSec,
SSL
5.3. Examples of applications

6. Wireless IP Networks
6.1. IP networks with mobile wireless
access
6.2. Architecture of 1x and
GPRS/UMTS/LTE
6.3. End-to-end scenario

7. Summary

3. Key Characteristics of IP
3.1.
3.2.
3.3.
3.4.
3.5.

IP addressing
Different versions of IP
Limitations of IPv4
Key features and benefits of IPv6
Migrating from IPv4 to IPv6

Put It All Together


Assess the knowledge of the participant
based on the objectives of the course

4. IP Networking Protocols and Their


Roles
4.1.
4.2.
4.3.
4.4.
4.5.

54

DHCP, DNS, ARP, PPP


RIP, OSPF, BGP
Domain Name System (DNS)
IP forwarding
TCP and UDP

2015 Award
Award
Solutions,
Inc.www.awardsolutions.com
www.awardsolutions.com+1.972.664.0727
+1.972.664.0727
2015
Solutions,
Inc.

v4.0

IP Convergence Overview

eLearning | Average Duration: 4 hours | Course Number: IPC_104


As wireless and wireline networks mature, data usage increases, and network infrastructure and services become more IP-centric, more personnel will be
responsible for managing and working with IP-centric networks. A solid understanding of IP and data communications will be essential for personnel at all
levels to be effective in a data-oriented environment. This course provides the background and concepts to understand the motivations of networks
converging toward IP. It discusses the challenges of transport of media (voice and video) using IP (VoIP) as the transport service in telecommunication
networks. It presents the unique flavor of this challenge from the perspective of the three basic types of network for the telecommunications world access
networks, core networks, and services network.

Intended Audience

Knowledge Knuggets

This course is intended for those seeking a high level understanding of the
convergence toward IP-centric networks. This includes those in sales,
marketing, project management, technical management, and executive
management.

Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to:

List the key motivations for voice and video over IP


Define IP convergence
Describe the use of IP as transport in access networks
Discuss the use of IP as transport in core networks and the
associated major technologies
Outline the use of IP as transport in services networks and the
associated major technologies
Explain the possible evolution paths of networks today

1. State of the Industry

1.1. Defining IP convergence


1.2. Motivations for convergence
1.2.1. Quad play
1.2.2. OPEX
1.2.3. Other converged services
1.3. What are voice and video over IP?
1.4. Where is the industry going?
1.5. Markets and regulatory environment
1.6. Discontinuities?
1.7. Common approaches in networks

2. IP Convergence in Access Networks


2.1.
2.2.
2.3.
2.4.
2.5.

Scope of the convergence


Residential cable, DSL, FTTH
Enterprise PBX, host-based
Wireless UMTS, 1xEV-DO, WiMAX
Challenges and scenarios

4.3. Supporting
technologies/protocols
4.3.1. SIP
4.3.2. H.323
4.3.3. Megaco/H.248
4.4. Deployment and challenges

5. Looking Ahead
5.1. Time frames
5.2. Looking forward

6. Summary
Put It All Together
Exercise 1

3. IP Convergence in Core Networks


3.1.
3.2.
3.3.
3.4.

The carrier network challenge


QoS
RTP and RTCP
PSTN and SS7 interworking

4. IP Convergence in Services Networks


4.1. The service network challenge
4.2. The service network competitors
4.2.1. IMS/MMD
4.2.2. P2P (Skype, MS LCS, etc.)

2015 Award
AwardSolutions,
Solutions,Inc.
Inc. www.awardsolutions.com
www.awardsolutions.com+1.972.664.0727
+1.972.664.0727
2015

v2.0

55

Overview of MPLS

eLearning | Average Duration: 3.5 hours | Course Number: IPC_106


As the services and applications of the Internet continue to expand, the Internet backbone must evolve to support them. The key areas of emphasis are
routing, QoS, addressing, efficiency and security. Multi Protocol Label Switching (MPLS) is designed to make the Internet fast, scalable and manageable, and
capable of carrying heavy traffic, supporting QoS and new routing architectures. This course presents a technical overview of MPLS including a detailed
discussion on the architecture of MPLS, the components of the MPLS network and the supporting protocols required for MPLS. Operational issues of MPLS
and issues related to interworking MPLS with ATM are also explored. The course ends with a discussion of G-MPLS, which is the evolution of MPLS.

Knowledge Knuggets

Intended Audience
This course is intended for anyone seeking an overview of MPLS, its
features and capabilities.

Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to:

Describe the motivation behind MPLS


State the role of MPLS in the convergence of networks
List key applications of MPLS
Compare and contrast the routing techniques of ATM and MPLS
Sketch the architecture of MPLS
Describe the important components and operations of MPLS
Describe how MPLS is used to set up layer 3 and layer 2 VPNs
Explain the role of MPLS in traffic engineering
Identify the next steps for MPLS including G-MPLS

1. Prologue
1.1.
1.2.
1.3.
1.4.

Introduction to MPLS
Motivation for MPLS
IP forwarding techniques
MPLS forwarding techniques

2. Current state of IP networks


2.1. Limitations of IP networks
2.2. IP over ATM solutions

3. Why MPLS?
3.1. Advantages of MPLS
3.2. New applications

4. MPLS Networks
4.1. MPLS domain
4.2. Label edge router
4.3. Label switch router

5. MPLS Terminology
5.1. Label Switched Paths (LSP)
5.2. Forward Equivalence Class (FEC)
5.3. Structure of a label

6. Packet Forwarding Along LSPs


6.1. Label Forwarding Information Base
(LFIB)
6.2. Packet forwarding along LSPs
6.3. Label stacking

7. LSP Setup Process

8. MPLS Protocols
8.1. New protocols
8.2. Example of protocol use

9. MPLS and Virtual Private Networks


9.1. VPNs support in MPLS
9.2. Layer 3 and Layer 2 VPNs
establishment in MPLS
9.3. Label stacking and VPNs
9.4. MPLS based L2 VPN solutions

10. MPLS and Traffic Engineering


10.1. Introduction to traffic engineering
10.2. MPLS traffic engineering
procedures

11. Deployment
11.1. Current deployments
11.2. Next steps

12. Evolution of MPLS


12.1. New applications
12.2. Generalized MPLS (G-MPLS)

13. Summary
Put It All Together
Assess the knowledge of the participant
based on the objectives of the course

7.1. Hop-by-hop routed LSPs


7.2. Explicit routed LSPs

56

2015 Award
Award
Solutions,Inc.
Inc.www.awardsolutions.com
www.awardsolutions.com+1.972.664.0727
+1.972.664.0727
2015
Solutions,

v3.0

Overview of IMS

eLearning | Average Duration: 2.5 hours | Course Number: IPC_107


The Internet Protocol Multimedia Subsystem (IMS) is a significant core network evolution that uses common Internet-based protocols to provide global,
access-independent and standard-based IP connectivity and service control. The IMS architecture is a key enabler of various types of multimedia services to
end-users. IMS helps provide a network that fulfills the promise of all-IP networks, allowing a combination of real-time and non- real-time services to be
delivered to a single device. IMS is access network independent and, hence, promotes interoperability between wireline, cellular, WLAN, CATV, FTTH and other
types of access networks. This course explores the various concepts used in the IP Multimedia Subsystem (IMS) including architecture, network components
and interfaces. Please note that this course does not cover any specific access technology.

Knowledge Knuggets

Intended Audience
This course is intended for those seeking a high level understanding of the
IP Multimedia Subsystem (IMS). This includes those in sales and
marketing, product planning, product management, design, integration,
verification and deployment.

Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to:
List the driving forces, requirements and goals of the IP Multimedia
Subsystem (IMS)
Identify the building blocks used to construct the IMS
Describe the functions of the IMS architecture that support
multimedia functions
Explain the roles of SIP, MEGACO, DIAMETER, and the enabling
technologies used in the architecture
Describe how functions such as mobility, and call processing are
carried out in the new architecture
Explain end-to-end service establishment flows in the IMS
architecture
Describe scenarios that illustrate interworking with the PSTN

Suggested Prerequisites
IP Convergence Overview (eLearning)

1. Setting the Stage


1.1.
1.2.
1.3.
1.4.
1.5.

Trends for telephony services


Evolution of mobile networks
Define IMS
Benefits and challenges of IMS
IMS service examples

2. IMS Architecture
2.1. Origin of IMS
2.2. Architecture reference models
2.3. Components and functions

3. Signaling and Transport


3.1. IMS reference points
3.2. Role of SIP, DIAMETER and
H.248/Megaco
3.3. Basics of voice transmission
3.4. QoS management in IMS
3.5. RTP and RTCP

5. Interworking
5.1. Interoperability between PSTN
and IMS
5.2. Compare PSTN call establishment
with IMS to IMS call
5.3. Establishing a call with the PSTN
5.4. Messages required for a call to
the PSTN

6. Summary
Put It All Together
Assess the knowledge of the participant
based on the objectives of the course

4. IMS Scenarios
4.1.
4.2.
4.3.
4.4.

IMS registration
IMS session setup
Role of application servers
Examples

2015 Award
AwardSolutions,
Solutions,Inc.
Inc. www.awardsolutions.com
www.awardsolutions.com+1.972.664.0727
+1.972.664.0727
2015

v3.0

57

Voice and Video over IP (VoIP) Overview


eLearning | Average Duration: 3 hours | Course Number: IPC_108

Quad Play (Voice, Video, Data, and Wireless) is the name for the latest evolution in the communications industry. Since more people will be responsible for
operating, maintaining and working with IP-centric networks, this course provides the essential knowledge on Voice and Video services using IP (VVoIP) in
modern communications networks. We begin the course with a look at the motivation for change and the network architectures of today and tomorrow. We
move on to provide an end-to-end view of the call setups that establish VVoIP networks, followed by a look at IPTV, and a high-level examination of the
underlying protocols and technologies used in the devices, the edge (access) networks, and the core networks that provide appropriate Quality of Service
(QoS). The course offers exercises designed to reinforce key objectives and make participant comfortable with the concepts.

Intended Audience

Knowledge Knuggets

This course is intended for those seeking a high-level but comprehensive


understanding of VVoIP in both its voice and video renditions. The intended
audience includes those in sales, marketing, product and strategic
planning, product documentation, product management, system design
and integration, and application verification and deployments. The course
is also good preparation for more advanced courses in the underlying
subjects.

Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to:

Describe the motivation behind VVoIP


Provide an overview of VVoIP
Explain how VVoIP calls are set up
Introduce IPTV
Describe how Quality of Service (QoS) can be implemented
Illustrate video traffic operations
Explain the interworking of VVoIP networks with other types of
networks
Discuss VVoIP deployments

1. Introduction
1.1. Motivation for VVoIP
1.2. Characteristics of VVoIP
1.3. Network architecture
1.3.1. Today Tomorrow
1.3.2. PSTN Managed packets
1.4. Key requirements
1.5. Challenges of VVoIP and
convergence

2. Setting up a Call
2.1. Architecture of a SIP network
2.2. Voice over IP call flow
2.2.1. Authentication
2.2.2. QoS negotiation
2.2.3. Monitoring traffic flow
2.3. Video over IP call flow
2.4. SIP and SDP basics
2.5. Comparison of SIP and H.323

3. IPTV

5. Traffic Operations
5.1. Device traffic operations
5.2. Media encoding
5.3. Media transport

6. Interworking with Other Networks


6.1. Architecture and media gateways
6.2. SIGTRAN and SCTP
6.3. End-to-end call set up with the
PSTN

7. Deployment Considerations
7.1. Dimensioning
7.2. Key performance indicators
7.3. Security

8. Summary
Put it all Together
Assess the knowledge of the participant
based on the objectives of the course

3.1. The changing TV service model


3.2. IPTV networks and protocols

4. QoS Requirements and Solutions


4.1. QoS challenges
4.2. Possible solutions

58

2015 Award
Award
Solutions,
Inc.www.awardsolutions.com
www.awardsolutions.com+1.972.664.0727
+1.972.664.0727
2015
Solutions,
Inc.

v3.0

IP Quality of Service (QoS)

eLearning | Average Duration: 3 hours | Course Number: IPC_109


The Internet is coming to a new age where various applications have their own QoS requirements, and one size definitely does not fit all. This course
introduces the concept of QoS and discusses the current limitations within the Internet. The new services requirements driving QoS in the Internet are
presented. The two basic techniques used for QoS - Integrated Services and Differentiated Services - are presented. The discussion includes the benefits and
limitations of the Integrated Services and the Differentiated Services approaches to QoS. While IntServ and DiffServ are the approaches, service providers
need an infrastructure to deploy QoS-based applications rapidly. This course describes the policy-based QoS architecture which supports the infrastructure for
delivering QoS based applications. Finally, emerging trends in IP QoS are introduced.

Knowledge Knuggets

Intended Audience
This course is intended for anyone seeking an overview of the IP Quality of
Service architectures in the Internet.

Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to:

Determine the limitations of the best effort approach to QoS


Describe the need for QoS with respect to new applications
Explain how QoS requirements are communicated
Define policy-based architecture
Explain the benefits and limitations of the Integrated Services
approach to QoS
Explain the benefits and limitations of the Differentiated Services
approach to QoS
Describe the protocols that are used for each of the QoS
approaches
Identify emerging trends in IP QoS

1. Motivation for Quality of Service (QoS)


1.1. Definition of Quality of Service
1.2. Service examples
1.3. QoS parameters

2. QoS in todays Internet


2.1. Current QoS mechanisms
2.2. Limitations of the current QoS
mechanisms

3. QoS Requirements
3.1.
3.2.
3.3.
3.4.

7. Emerging Trends in QoS


7.1. Hybrid architectures
7.2. Automated QoS management
7.3. Bandwidth brokers

8. Summary
Put It All Together
Assess the knowledge of the participant
based on the objectives of the course

Requirements of QoS on the Internet


Service Level Agreements (SLAs)
Challenges for deploying IP QoS
Policy based QoS architecture

4. QoS Models
4.1. Application approach vs. aggregated
approach
4.2. Introduction to IP QoS models

5. Integrated Services Approach (IntServ)


5.1. Integrated Service approach
5.2. Limitations of the Integrated Services
approach
5.3. ReSerVation Protocol (RSVP)

6. Differentiated Services Approach


(DiffServ)
6.1.
6.2.
6.3.
6.4.
6.5.

Differentiated services approach


DiffServ protocol
DiffServ implementation
Traffic management functions
Issues with DiffServ

2015 Award
AwardSolutions,
Solutions,Inc.
Inc. www.awardsolutions.com
www.awardsolutions.com+1.972.664.0727
+1.972.664.0727
2015

v2.0

59

Session Initiation Protocol (SIP)

eLearning | Average Duration: 2 hours | Course Number: IPC_110


The Internet has become the single network that provides universal connectivity around the world. One of the new and exciting uses of the Internet is to
provide voice and multimedia services. A protocol must exist to establish these voice and multimedia calls. This course discusses the Session Initiation
Protocol (SIP). SIP was developed by the Internet Engineering Task Force (IETF) to establish voice and multimedia calls through the Internet. SIP is designed to
establish voice calls as well as any connection between two or more parties. This connection can vary from simple Instant Messaging to more complex
multimedia sessions. The messaging and architecture of SIP are explained in detail including the key contents of the messages and the key components of
the architecture. The concepts of SIP are solidified with the presentation of a series of multimedia service establishment examples.

Knowledge Knuggets

Intended Audience
This course is intended for anyone seeking an overview of SIP, its features
and capabilities.

Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to:
Explain the motivation behind a consolidated voice and data
network
Describe the challenges of a consolidated network
Define the term softswitch and its usage
Describe how SIP will be used to establish everything from voice
calls to multimedia sessions
Identify components in the SIP architecture and their function in the
converged network
State the use and flexibility of the Session Description Protocol
Explain how SIP is being extended to provide additional capabilities

Suggested Prerequisites
Welcome to IP Networking (eLearning)

1. Motivation for Voice over IP networks


1.1. Motivation for consolidating voice
and data
1.2. Benefits of a consolidated network
1.3. Challenges of a consolidated
network

2. Key Features of SIP


2.1. Introduction to SIP
2.2. Key characteristics and features of
SIP

7. Looking Ahead
7.1. Future of SIP

8. Summary
Put It All Together
Assess the knowledge of the participant
based on the objectives of the course

3. SIP Messaging
3.1.
3.2.
3.3.
3.4.

Basic session establishment


Session Description Protocol
Addressing
Registration

4. SIP Architecture
4.1. Functions and capabilities of SIP
servers
4.2. Role of User Agent
4.3. Proxy and redirect servers
4.4. Function of a softswitch

5. Examples of session establishment


5.1. Establishment of a video call via LAN
5.2. Establishment of a voice call via ITSP

6. SIP Challenge
6.1. Extensions
6.2. Firewall traversal

60

2015 Award
Award
Solutions,
Inc.www.awardsolutions.com
www.awardsolutions.com+1.972.664.0727
+1.972.664.0727
2015
Solutions,
Inc.

v3.0

IP Basics

eLearning | Average Duration: 1 hour | Course Number: IPC_114


As the communications industry transitions to wireless and wireline converged networks to support voice, video, data and mobile services over IP, a solid
understanding of IP and its role in networking is essential. IP is to data transfer as what a dial tone is to a wireline telephone. A fundamental knowledge of
IPv4 and IPv6 networking along with use of VLANs is a must for all telecom professionals. A solid foundation in IP has become a basic job requirement in the
carrier world. Starting with a brief history, the course provides a focused basic level introduction to the fundamentals of IP technology. It is a modular
introductory course only on IP basics as part of the overall eLearning IP fundamentals curriculum.

Knowledge Knuggets

Intended Audience
This course is intended for those seeking a basic level introduction to the
Internet Protocol (IP).

Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to:

1.
2.
3.
4.

IP Address
IP Subnets
IP Header
Multicast and Broadcast

Describe the purpose and structure of an IP address


Describe network prefix
Explain the purpose of CIDR Prefix
Explain the purpose of Subnet Mask
Describe IP Subnets
Explain the IP header and its key fields
Describe broadcasting in IP networks
Describe multicasting in IP networks

2015 Award
AwardSolutions,
Solutions,Inc.
Inc. www.awardsolutions.com
www.awardsolutions.com+1.972.664.0727
+1.972.664.0727
2015

v1.0

61

IP Routing

eLearning | Average Duration: 1 hour | Course Number: IPC_113


As the communications industry transitions to wireless and wireline converged networks to support voice, video, data and mobile services over IP, a solid
understanding of IP and its role in networking is essential. IP is to data transfer as a dial tone is to a wireline telephone. A fundamental knowledge of IPv4 and
IPv6 networking along with use of routing is a must for all telecom professionals. A solid foundation in IP and routing has become a basic job requirement in
the carrier world. Understanding of IP routing protocols is an important part of building this foundation. Starting with a basic definition, the course provides a
focused base level introduction to the fundamentals of IP routing and associated protocols like OSPF, BGP, and VRRP. It is a modular introductory course only
on IP routing as part of the overall eLearning IP fundamentals curriculum.

Knowledge Knuggets

Intended Audience
This course is intended for those seeking a basic level introduction to IP
routing and the common associated protocols.

Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to:
Define the differences between IP routing and forwarding
Distinguish between Interior Gateway Protocols and Exterior
Gateway Protocols and give examples of each
Explain Open Shortest Path First (OSPF) and how it is used
List the main types of Link State Advertisements in OSPF
Describe Border Gateway Protocol (BGP) and how it is used
Show how route reflectors simplify network configuration and
reduce routing overhead
Explain how PING can be used to verify end-to-end connectivity in an
IP Network
Describe how Traceroute can be used to track down routing errors
in a network

1. What is IP routing?
1.1. IP routing basics
1.2. Routing and forwarding
1.3. Routing protocols

2. Open Shortest Path First (OSPF)


2.1. OSPF basics
2.2. A closer look at OSPF

3. Border Gateway Protocol (BGP)


3.1. BGP basics
3.2. A closer look at BGP
3.3. Scaling BGP

4. Redundancy Protocols
4.1. Introduction
4.2. VRRP
4.3. GLBP

5. Debugging Tools and Utilities


5.1. PING
5.2. Traceroute

6. Summary

62

2015 Award
Award
Solutions,Inc.
Inc.www.awardsolutions.com
www.awardsolutions.com+1.972.664.0727
+1.972.664.0727
2015
Solutions,

v1.0

QoS in IP Networks

eLearning | Average Duration: 1 hour | Course Number: IPC_115


As the communications industry transitions to wireless and wireline converged networks to support voice, video, data and mobile services over IP, a solid
understanding of IP and its role in networking is essential. IP is to data transfer as what a dial tone is to a wireline telephone. A fundamental knowledge of
IPv4 and IPv6 networking along with the use of IP for Quality of Service (QoS) is a must for all telecom professionals. A solid foundation in IP and QoS has
become a basic job requirement in the carrier world. Various applications have their own QoS requirements in converged networks, and one size definitely
does not fit all. This course introduces the concept of QoS. The two basic techniques used for QoS - Integrated Services and Differentiated Services - are
presented. While IntServ and DiffServ are the approaches, service providers need an infrastructure to deploy QoS-based applications rapidly. This is a modular
introductory course on IP QoS basics as part of the overall eLearning IP fundamentals curriculum.

Knowledge Knuggets

Intended Audience
This course is intended for anyone seeking an overview of the IP Quality of
Service architectures.

Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to:

Explore the Motivations for QoS in an IP network


Describe the different QoS parameters
Define the QoS process and Service Level Agreements
Explain the Policy based QoS architecture
Differentiate the IP QoS models: IntServ and DiffServ
Explain in detail how the DiffServ model is implemented
Explain how QoS is achieved in the LTE network

1. Motivation for Quality of Service


1.1. Definition of Quality of Service
1.2. QoS parameters
1.3. Service examples

2. QoS Requirements
2.1.
2.2.
2.3.
2.4.

Requirements of QoS
QoS process
Service Level Agreement (SLA)
Policy based QoS architecture

3. QoS Models
3.1. Introduction to IP QoS models
3.2. Integrated Services (IntServ)
3.3. Differentiated Services (DiffServ)

4. DiffServ
4.1.
4.2.
4.3.
4.4.
4.5.

Differentiated services approach


DiffServ protocol
DSCP
Traffic enforcement functions
DiffServ support in Ethernet and
MPLS
4.6. QoS in LTE network

2015 Award
AwardSolutions,
Solutions,Inc.
Inc. www.awardsolutions.com
www.awardsolutions.com+1.972.664.0727
+1.972.664.0727
2015

v1.0

63

TCP and Transport Layer Protocols

eLearning | Average Duration: 1 hour | Course Number: IPC_117


As the communications industry transitions to wireless and wireline converged networks to support voice, video, data and mobile services over IP, a solid
understanding of IP and its role in networking is essential. IP is to data transfer as what a dial tone is to a wireline telephone. A fundamental knowledge of
IPv4 and IPv6 networking along with use of IP based transport protocols is a must for all telecom professionals. A solid foundation in IP has become a basic
job requirement in the carrier world. Understanding of TCP and other IP based transport layer protocols is an important part of building this foundation.
Starting with a basic definition, the course provides a focused basic level introduction to the fundamentals of IP based transport layer protocols like TCP, UDP
and SCTP. It is a modular introductory course only on IP basics as part of the overall eLearning IP fundamentals curriculum.

Knowledge Knuggets

Intended Audience
This course is intended for those seeking a basic level introduction to the
IP-based transport layer protocols - TCP, UDP and SCTP.

Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to:
Explain the key transport layer functions and the concept of ports
Describe User Datagram Protocol (UDP) and Transmission Control
Protocol (TCP)
Explain how TCP provides reliable communication over IP and
achieves optimal transmission
Define the special requirements for carrying telecom signaling over
IP networks
List the key functions of Stream Control Transmission Protocol
(SCTP)

64

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Overview of the Transport Layer


User Datagram Protocol
Transmission Control Protocol
Stream Control Transport Protocol
Summary

2015 Award
Award
Solutions,
Inc.www.awardsolutions.com
www.awardsolutions.com+1.972.664.0727
+1.972.664.0727
2015
Solutions,
Inc.

v1.0

Ethernet Basics

eLearning | Average Duration: 1 hour | Course Number: IPC_119


As the communications industry transitions to wireless and wireline converged networks to support voice, video, data and mobile services over IP networks, a
solid understanding of Ethernet and its role in networking is essential. Ethernet is native to IP and has been adopted in various forms by the communication
industry. A solid foundation in IP and Ethernet has become a basic job requirement in the industry. Starting with a brief history, the course provides a focused
basic level introduction to the fundamentals of Ethernet technology. It is a modular introductory course only on Ethernet basics as part of the overall eLearning
IP fundamentals curriculum.

Knowledge Knuggets

Intended Audience
This course is intended for those seeking a basic level introduction to
Ethernet technology.

Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to:

Define Ethernet
Summarize the key variations of the Ethernet family of standards
Discuss Ethernet addressing and frame structure
Discuss Ethernet services offered by carriers

1. Ethernet Defined
2. Ethernet Standards
3. Ethernet Addressing and Frame
Structure
4. Carrier Ethernet
5. Summary

2015 Award
AwardSolutions,
Solutions,Inc.
Inc. www.awardsolutions.com
www.awardsolutions.com+1.972.664.0727
+1.972.664.0727
2015

v1.0

65

Ethernet VLANs

eLearning | Average Duration: 1 hour | Course Number: IPC_118


As the communications industry transitions to wireless and wireline converged networks to support voice, video, data and mobile services over IP networks, a
solid understanding of Ethernet and its role in networking is essential. Ethernet is native to IP and has been adopted in various forms by the telecom industry
as the Layer 1 and Layer 2 of choice. VLANs are used extensively in the end-to-end IP network and a solid foundation in IP and Ethernet has become a basic
job requirement for the carrier world. Starting with a brief history, the course provides a focused basic level introduction to the fundamentals of Ethernet VLAN
technology. It is a modular introductory course only on Ethernet VLAN basics as part of the overall eLearning IP fundamentals curriculum. The course includes
a pre-test and a post-test.

Knowledge Knuggets

Intended Audience
This course is intended for those seeking a basic level introduction to
Ethernet Bridging.

Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to:
Define Ethernet VLANs
Identify Ethernet VLAN applications and benefits
Summarize the key variations of the Ethernet family of standards to
support VLANs
Identify the key types of Ethernet VLANs
Describe VLAN Trunks and their purpose

66

1.
2.
3.
4.

Virtual Local Area Networks (VLANs)


VLAN Application and Benefits
Default VLAN
Multiswitch VLANs: Trunks and
Tagging
5. Summary

2015 Award
Award
Solutions,
Inc.www.awardsolutions.com
www.awardsolutions.com+1.972.664.0727
+1.972.664.0727
2015
Solutions,
Inc.

v2.0

Ethernet Bridging

eLearning | Average Duration: 1 hour | Course Number: IPC_116


As the communications industry transitions to wireless and wireline converged networks to support voice, video, data and mobile services over IP networks, a
solid understanding of Ethernet and its role in networking is essential. Ethernet is native to IP and has been adopted in various forms by the telecom industry
as the Layer 1 and Layer 2 technology of choice. Ethernet bridging and associated capabilities are used extensively in the end-to-end IP network and a solid
foundation in IP and Ethernet has become a basic job requirement in the carrier world. Starting with a brief history, the course provides a focused basic level
introduction to the fundamentals of Ethernet Bridging as a key capability of Ethernet based nodes. It is a modular introductory course only on Ethernet
Bridging basics as part of the overall eLearning IP fundamentals curriculum.

Knowledge Knuggets

Intended Audience
This course is intended for those seeking a basic level introduction to
Ethernet Bridging.

Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to:
Introduce Ethernet bridges and explain how they operate
Introduce Ethernet switches and explain how they differ from
Ethernet bridges
Discuss Spanning Tree Protocol and its variations
Introduce the concept of multilayer switching
Discuss the use of link aggregation group in Ethernet networks

1. Ethernet Bridge

1.1. Definition
1.2. History
1.3. Learning bridge

2. Ethernet Switch
2.1.
2.2.
2.3.
2.4.

Definition
History
Ethernet switching
Full duplex operation

3. Spanning Tree Protocol (STP)


3.1. Function
3.2. Operation
3.3. Variants

4. Multilayer Switch (MLS)


4.1. Definition
4.2. Function

5. Link Aggregation Group


5.1. Definition
5.2. Uses

6. Summary

2015 Award
AwardSolutions,
Solutions,Inc.
Inc. www.awardsolutions.com
www.awardsolutions.com+1.972.664.0727
+1.972.664.0727
2015

v2.0

67

Ethernet Backhaul Overview

eLearning | Average Duration: 3 hours | Course Number: IPC_122


Emerging 3G and 4G networks reflect two key fundamental changes in wireless networks. The first change is the trend toward an all IP network and the
second change is a more efficient radio interface resulting in a huge growth in the volume of traffic supported by the air interface. Traditional backhaul using
T1/E1 leased lines is no longer economical so new backhaul solutions are being deployed. This course describes the key issues leading to the need for new
backhaul solutions and provides an overview of the various backhaul solutions and related technologies. It introduces the backhaul network architecture and
reviews technologies such as ATM, DSL, Bonded T1/E1, DOCSIS, Microwave Radio, PON, Carrier Ethernet, MPLS/MPLS-TP and PBB-TE. A backhaul capacity
planning and technology migration scenario is presented, and the course ends with an exercise to test the students comprehension of the topics covered.

Knowledge Knuggets

Intended Audience
This course is suitable for those looking for a high level conceptual
overview of IP/Ethernet backhaul networks and an introduction to
associated technologies.

Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to:

68

List the requirements for 3G/4G backhaul


Describe the challenges for 3G/4G backhaul
Differentiate between the access and aggregation networks
Identify the networking options most likely deployed for Ethernet
Backhaul (EBH)
Discuss the role of various technologies in backhaul networks
Explain benefits of Carrier Ethernet and list various services
provided for backhaul
List the key issues related to migrating to an Ethernet-based
backhaul network
Identify tools and techniques used to seamlessly migrate to EBH
Compare different backhaul facilities and explain the pros and cons
of the available solutions
Explain where faults in the EBH network may occur, and how these
faults are detected and isolated
Identify the key challenges in sizing backhaul capacity links
Sketch possible migration path from a T1/E1 based backhaul
solution to tomorrows IP/Carrier Ethernet based backhaul solution

1. The Big Picture


1.1.
1.2.
1.3.
1.4.

What is Backhaul
Motivation for EBH
Backhaul requirements
Backhaul challenges

2. Backhaul Options
2.1.
2.2.
2.3.
2.4.

SONET transport
Microwave transport
Ethernet transport
Other transport

3. Carrier Ethernet (CE)


3.1.
3.2.
3.3.
3.4.
3.5.

What is it?
CE service types
CE connection granularity
Negotiating a CE service
EBH backhaul design

4. Key EBH Issues


4.1. Migration: Todays BH to tomorrows
BH
4.2. Joint backhaul of 2G, 3G, and 4G
traffic
4.3. Emerging all-IP environment
4.4. Timing and synchronization
4.5. EBH operations and management

6. Deploying and Operating an EBH


Network
6.1. Deployment testing (RFC2544;
Y.1731, CFM)
6.2. Fault detection and recovery
6.3. Performance monitoring

7. EBH Capacity Planning


7.1.
7.2.
7.3.
7.4.

Capacity planning process


Nature of data traffic
Forecasting subscriber mixes
Sizing EBH links

8. Summary
Putting it All Together
Exercise to assess the knowledge of the
participant based on the objectives of the
course

5. EBH Growing Pains


5.1.
5.2.
5.3.
5.4.

Market evolution
Bonding techniques
CE transport options
TDM-based to Ethernet-based
backhaul

2015 Award
Award
Solutions,
Inc.www.awardsolutions.com
www.awardsolutions.com+1.972.664.0727
+1.972.664.0727
2015
Solutions,
Inc.

v1.0

Interconnecting in IP Networks

eLearning | Average Duration: 1 hour | Course Number: IPC_120


As the communications industry transitions to wireless and wireline converged networks to support voice, video, data and mobile services over IP networks, a solid
understanding of IP and its role in inter-networking is essential. IP is to data transfer as a dial tone is to a wireline telephone. A fundamental knowledge of IPv4 and
IPv6 networking along with their use for inter-networking is a must for all telecom professionals. A solid foundation in IP has become a basic job requirement in carrier
networks. As the services and applications of wireless networks continue to expand, the backbone must evolve to support them. Multi Protocol Label Switching (MPLS)
is designed to make the backbone fast, scalable and manageable, and capable of carrying heavy traffic, supporting QoS. This course presents a technical overview of
MPLS including a discussion on the architecture of MPLS, the components of the MPLS network and the supporting protocols required for MPLS. It is a modular
introductory course only on MPLS basics as part of the overall eLearning IP fundamentals curriculum.

Knowledge Knuggets

Intended Audience
This course is intended for anyone seeking a basic level overview of the
MPLS and IP interconnecting architectures.

1. Why MPLS?

Learning Objectives

2. MPLS Networks

After completing this course, the student will be able to:


Describe the motivation behind MPLS
State the role of MPLS in the convergence of networks
List key applications of MPLS
Sketch the architecture of MPLS
Describe the important components and operations of MPLS
Describe how MPLS is used to set up layer 3 and layer 2 VPNs

1.1. Advantages of MPLS


1.2. New applications
2.1. MPLS domain
2.2. Label edge router
2.3. Label switch router

3. MPLS Terminology
3.1. Label Switched Paths (LSP)
3.2. Forward Equivalence Class (FEC)
3.3. Structure of a label

4. Packet Forwarding Along LSPs


4.1. Label Forwarding Information Base
(LFIB)
4.2. Packet forwarding along LSPs
4.3. Label stacking

5. MPLS and Virtual Private Networks


5.1. VPNs support in MPLS
5.2. Layer 3 and Layer 2 VPNs
establishment in MPLS
5.3. Label stacking and VPNs
5.4. MPLS based L2 VPN solutions

2015 Award
AwardSolutions,
Solutions,Inc.
Inc. www.awardsolutions.com
www.awardsolutions.com+1.972.664.0727
+1.972.664.0727
2015

v2.0

69

Welcome to IPv6

eLearning | Average Duration: 1 hour | Course Number: IPC_121


As the communications industry transitions to wireless, wireline converged networks to support voice, video, data and mobile services over IP networks, a solid
understanding of IP and its role in networking is essential. IP is to data transfer as a dial tone is to a wireline telephone. A fundamental knowledge of IPv4 and
IPv6 networking along with use of IP for QoS is a must for all telecom professionals. IPv6 was defined in 1998 but saw little adoption for over a decade. With
continued IPv4 address depletion and the migration to wireless VoIP in LTE networks, the time for widespread adoption has finally arrived. This course begins
with a look at the motivation for migrating to IPv6 and some of the benefits. The IPv6 header and addressing concepts are explained next. The 128 bit address
necessitates changes to many of the supporting protocols for IP and those are discussed next. The course concludes with a look at the various approaches to
migrating from IPv4 to IPv6 and how these are deployed in LTE networks.

Knowledge Knuggets

Intended Audience
This course is intended for technical personnel with a grounding in IPv4
networks who are seeking an technical overview of IPv6 and related
protocols.

Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to:

70

Describe why the migration to IPv6 is finally happening


List the key benefits of IPv6
Explain key fields in the IPv6 header
Discuss how IPv6 addresses are formatted and how they are
assigned
Explain how the basic IP supporting protocols are enhanced to
support IPV6
Describe how automatic routing for IPv6 networks is enabled by
BGP and OSPF
Discuss how dual stack devices help ease the transition from IPv4
to IPv6
Understand the differences between configured and automatic
tunnels for IPv6 transition
Describe how LTE networks use IPv6 and why it is necessary

1. Motivation and Benefits


1.1. IPv4 address depletion
1.2. Limitations of NAT
1.3. Benefits of IPv6

2. IPv6 Header and Addresses


2.1.
2.2.
2.3.
2.4.
2.5.

Header format
Address format
Address notation
Types of addresses
Address assignment

3. Supporting Protocols
3.1.
3.2.
3.3.
3.4.
3.5.

ICMP
DNS
DHCP
OSPF
BGP

4. Transition to IPv6
4.1.
4.2.
4.3.
4.4.
4.5.

The transition problem


Dual stack
Configured tunneling
Automatic tunneling
IPv6 in LTE

2015 Award
Award
Solutions,Inc.
Inc.www.awardsolutions.com
www.awardsolutions.com+1.972.664.0727
+1.972.664.0727
2015
Solutions,

v1.0

IP Convergence Essentials

Instructor Led | Duration: 1 Day | Course Number: IPC_101


As wireless and wireline networks mature, data usage increases, and network infrastructure and services become more IP-centric, more personnel will be
responsible for managing and working with IP-centric networks. A solid understanding of IP and data communications will be essential for personnel at all
levels to be effective in a data-oriented environment. This course provides the background and concepts to understand the motivations of networks
converging towards IP. It discusses the challenges of transport of media (voice and video) using IP (VoIP) as the transport service in telecommunication
networks. It presents the unique flavor of this challenge from the perspective of the three basic types of network for the telecommunications world: Access
networks, core networks, and services networks.

Intended Audience
This course is intended for those seeking a high level understanding of the
convergence toward IP-centric networks. This includes those in sales,
marketing, project management, technical management, and executive
management.

Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to:

List the key motivations for voice and video over IP


Define IP convergence
Describe the use of IP as transport in access networks
Discuss the use of IP as transport in core networks and the
associated major technologies
Outline the use of IP as transport in services networks and the
associated major technologies
Explain the possible evolution paths of networks today

Suggested Prerequisites
Welcome to IP Networking (eLearning)

Course Outline
1. Introduction to IP Convergence
1.1. Defining IP convergence
1.2. Motivations for convergence
1.2.1. Quad play
1.2.2. OPEX
1.2.3. Other converged services
1.3. What are voice and video over IP?
1.4. Where is the industry going?
1.5. Markets and regulatory environment
1.6. Discontinuities?
1.7. Common approaches in networks

2. IP and VoIP Fundamentals


2.1.
2.2.
2.3.
2.4.

5. Service Network Convergence


5.1.
5.2.
5.3.
5.4.
5.5.
5.6.

The service network challenge


NGN
IMS
IPTV
IPTN in NGN with IMS
Deployment and challenges

6. Looking Ahead
6.1.
6.2.
6.3.
6.4.

Timeframes
Carrier ethernet
4G wireless
Summary

Circuit-Switching vs Packet-Switching
IP characterisitics
VoIP
QoS

3. Access Networks
3.1.
3.2.
3.3.
3.4.

Scope of the convergence


Residential cable, DSL and FTTH
Enterprise PBX and host-based
Wireless UMTS, 1xEV-DO, LTE and
WiMAX
3.5. Challenges and scenarios

4. Core Networks
4.1.
4.2.
4.3.
4.4.
4.5.

The carrier network challenge


QoS
IPv4
IPv6
IP in ATM vs MPLS

2015 Award
AwardSolutions,
Solutions,Inc.
Inc. www.awardsolutions.com
www.awardsolutions.com+1.972.664.0727
+1.972.664.0727
2015

v1.1

71

Exploring MPLS

Instructor Led | Duration: 2 Days | Course Number: IPC_203


The Internet has to evolve on many fronts with regard to routing, QoS, addressing, efficiency and security. Multi Protocol Label Switching (MPLS) belongs to
the group of technologies designed to achieve this evolution. MPLS is designed to make the Internet fast, scalable, manageable, carry multimedia traffic,
support QoS and support new routing architectures. This course is designed for those who need to understand how to deploy and manage MPLS networks.
The course consists of three parts. The first part discusses MPLS technology including MPLS concepts, terminology, and signaling protocols. Next we cover
MPLS applications such as IP-VPN, Layer 2 VPN, Pseuodowires, QoS, Traffic Engineering, and Voice over MPLS. These concepts and applications are explained
with examples.

Intended Audience

Course Outline

This course is appropriate for technical audiences that wish to understand


the benefits of MPLS, its network architecture, options for signaling, and
the major applications that MPLS supports.

Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to:

Explore the benefits and rationale for MPLS


Sketch the MPLS network architecture,
Use the MPLS terminology and explain key concepts
Describe the use of MPLS signaling protocols
List and explain the applications of MPLS
Sketch the MPLS solutions for IP-VPN and Layer 2 VPN solutions
Learn how MPLS is used to support QoS
Show how Traffic Engineering (TE) operations are executed in an
MPLS network
Sketch the redundancy solutions in MPLS networks (e.g. FRR)

1. Prologue
1.1. The big picture

2. IP Foundation for MPLS


2.1. Communications overview
2.2. IP routing and forwarding
2.3. IP in ATM vs. MPLS networks

3. Introduction to MPLS
3.1. IP routing and forwarding
3.2. MPLS label switching

8. MPLS and Traffic Engineering


8.1.
8.2.
8.3.
8.4.

Motivation for traffic engineering


Traffic engineering
Traffic engineering process
Fast re-route

9. MPLS Virtual Private Networks


9.1. Virtual Private Networks overview
9.2. L2VPN
9.3. L3VPN

4. MPLS Networks
4.1.
4.2.
4.3.
4.4.

MPLS domain
Network components (LER, LSR)
Label Switched Path (LSP)
Forward Equivalence Class (FEC)

5. MPLS Labels
5.1.
5.2.
5.3.
5.4.

MPLS label structure


MPLS label binding
MPLS label distribution
Label swapping and forwarding

6. MPLS Protocols
6.1.
6.2.
6.3.
6.4.

Motivation for new protocols


Label Distribution Protocol (LDP)
RSVP
BGP and MP-BGP

7. MPLS and QoS


7.1. Motivation for QoS
7.2. DiffServ in MPLS
72

2015 Award
Award
Solutions,
Inc.www.awardsolutions.com
www.awardsolutions.com+1.972.664.0727
+1.972.664.0727
2015
Solutions,
Inc.

v4.3

Exploring IMS (R8)

Instructor Led | Duration: 3 Days | Course Number: IPC_204


The IP Multimedia Subsystem (IMS) is an access-independent service control architecture that enables multimedia services to end users via Internet-based
protocols. Expertise on IMS is essential for communication professionals to successfully develop and deploy new multimedia services that are IMS-based. This
course investigates the IMS architecture including functions of nodes, key protocols and end-to-end operations for services using IMS. Enabling technologies
and protocols such as SIP, Megaco, RTP and the use of these technologies within the IMS architecture are explored. Service continuity, interconnection, and
current policy control are discussed. (Please note that this course does not cover any specific access technology.)

Course Outline

Intended Audience
This course is intended to provide a technical overview of the IMS. It is
appropriate for all technical personnel as well as those in product
management, technical sales, planning, architecture, design, deployment
and support.

Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to:

List the motivation, benefits and challenges associated with IMS


Sketch IMS network architecture
List the functions of the key components in IMS
Explain functions of key protocols such as SIP, Megaco, and RTP
Describe basic IMS operations
Explain how IMS enables dynamic Quality of Service (QoS)
Explain how IMS provides a service delivery platform
Discuss the IMS security architecture
Describe the IMS interconnection strategy
Explain how IMS is being used to provide service continuity between
different access networks
Depict scenarios that illustrate interworking with the PSTN
Sketch the IMS charging architecture

Suggested Prerequisites
IP Convergence Essentials (Instructor Led)
Overview of IMS (eLearning)

1. Introduction
1.1. The IP convergence big picture
1.2. Motivation and benefits of IMS

2. SIP Overview
2.1. Reference architecture
2.2. Operations

3. IMS Architecture
3.1. Reference architecture
3.2. Components and functions
3.3. CSCF, HSS, MGCF, MGW, etc.

4. IMS Signaling Protocols


4.1.
4.2.
4.3.
4.4.

IMS core network interfaces


IMS SIP
Diameter
Media protocols H.248, RTP, RTCP

5. IMS Basic Operations - Registration


5.1. Overview
5.2. Discovery and selection of nodes
5.3. Authentication

6. IMS Basic Operations Call Scenario


6.1. Overview
6.2. Media and QoS negotiation
6.3. Interworking with PSTN

7. IMS QoS

8. IMS Services
8.1. IMS application server
architecture
8.2. End to end applications
8.3. Network based applications
8.4. Media server interactions
8.5. Service Configuration (XCAP)

9. IMS Security
9.1. Key security challenges
9.2. Signaling and media protection
9.3. NAT/firewall traversal

10. Interconnection
10.1. IBCF
10.2. IPv6/IPv4
10.3. IMS SIP to Non-IMS SIP
10.4. IMS SIP to Non-SIP

11. IMS Mobility


11.1. IMS Centralized Services (ICS)
11.2. IMS Service Continuity (ISC)
11.3. SRVCC

12. Charging
12.1. Charging architecture
12.2. Offline charging
12.3. Online charging

7.1. 3GPP policy and charging control


7.2. QoS flow example

2015 Award
AwardSolutions,
Solutions,Inc.
Inc. www.awardsolutions.com
www.awardsolutions.com+1.972.664.0727
+1.972.664.0727
2015

v1.2

73

SIP and Diameter for IMS/VoLTE


Instructor Led | Duration: 2 Days

The Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) technology is a flexible and extensible protocol for making, changing, and terminating data sessions between one or more
participants. SIP has been adopted by many wireless and wireline telecommunications providers. While the basic operations of the protocol are simple and
straightforward, its level of sophistication and functional richness warrant a detailed analysis. This course provides an overview of the SIP architecture, related
protocols and Diameter in the context of IMS and VoLTE. The focus is to provide an introduction to the SIP architecture, SIP protocol and Diameter to
understand how these protocols come together with IMS and LTE to deliver voice services. Students will then step through some key SIP and Diameter
operations as they relate to delivering Voice services. The course concludes with a discussion of a Call Setup scenario to tie all the concepts together.

Intended Audience

Course Outline

This introductory course addresses the needs of technical professionals


who need to understand the use of SIP and Diameter in the context of IMS
and LTE to deploy VoLTE services.

Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to:

Explain the motivation for SIP for IMS and VoLTE


Describe the SIP architecture for IMS
List the key nodes and interfaces for IMS and VoLTE
Recognize how SIP interacts with other significant signaling
protocols
Describe Diameter and its role in the context of IMS/VoLTE
Describe Megaco and its role in the context of IMS/VoLTE
Explain the SIP protocol and operations for session establishment
and session changes
Describe key SIP operations including registration and
authentication
Synthesize at a high-level the concepts of SIP and Diameter and
how they apply to delivering VoLTE using IMS.

Suggested Prerequisites
Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) (eLearning)
Voice and Video over IP (VoIP) Overview (eLearning)

1. SIP Architecture for IMS


1.1. Reference architecture
1.2. Nodes and functions
1.2.1. CSCF, HSS
1.2.2. UE, AS, PCRF, PCEF
1.2.3. BGCF, MGCF, MGW
1.2.4. IBCF, TRGW
1.3. Interfaces
1.3.1. SIP interfaces
1.3.2. Diameter interfaces
1.3.2.1. Cx, Rx, Gx
1.3.3. Megaco interfaces

2. SIP and Related Protocols

5. Registration and Events


5.1.
5.2.
5.3.
5.4.

Registration
Authentication
User profile
Roles of application servers

6. SIP Operations
6.1. Call Setup
6.1.1. INVITE
6.1.2. ReINVITE
6.1.3. SIP/SDP
6.1.4. Megaco

7. Putting It All Together


7.1. VoLTE call setup

2.1. Transactions, dialogs and sessions


2.2. Message formats
2.3. SIP
2.3.1. SIP extensions
2.3.2. SDP
2.4. RTP/RTCP

3. Diameter
3.1.
3.2.
3.3.
3.4.
3.5.

Architecture and protocol


Message formats
Diameter extensions
DRA
Interface examples

4. Megaco
4.1. Message formats
4.2. Transactions
4.3. Contexts

74

2015 Award
Award
Solutions,Inc.
Inc.www.awardsolutions.com
www.awardsolutions.com+1.972.664.0727
+1.972.664.0727
2015
Solutions,

v1.0

Exploring TCP/IP Protocols

Instructor Led | Duration: 2 Days | Course Number: IPC_211


As IP and related technologies make their way into wireless service offerings and into the mobility network architecture and operations, network staff will need
to have a solid understanding of these technologies in order to continue meeting service and network performance objectives. Having this foundation of
knowledge enhances ones value to the organization and improves productivity and effectiveness when working with these new types of networking devices.
This session focuses on the TCP/IP protocol suite and the operations and fundamentals of routing, addressing and key features and function of essential
protocols. Exercises are designed to reinforce these concepts.

Course Outline

Intended Audience
This course is intended for those needing to understand the TCP/IP
Protocols and their use within the data and wireless networks.

Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to:
Describe the benefits of an IP network and the movement of data in
wired and wireless networks
List the layers of protocol stack in the OSI model and in the TCP/IP
model and define the main functions of each layer
List the protocols, addresses, PDUs, and devices used at each layer
of the TCP/IP protocol stack
Define the Ethernet frame structure, MAC addresses, and VLANs
Differentiate between the routing function and the forwarding
function of IP routers
Define Autonomous System and the Longest-Match Rule
List the key attributes of OSPF and BGP
Explain NAT and its relationship with the exhaustion of IPv4
addresses
Compare and contrast the IPv4 and IPv6 headers and explain the
use of IPv6 header extensions
List the types and formats of IP addresses used in IPv4 and IPv6
and explain their uses
Define DHCP and DNS and the role they play in IP networks
List key Internet applications and the protocols and traffic
characteristics of those applications
Outline the key concepts and functional components of VoLTE as
an IP application

1. Introduction
1.1. Introduction to packet networks
1.2. The Protocol Stack: OSI and Internet
models
1.3. One Hop at a Time

2. Physical Layer
2.1. Functions of the physical layer
2.2. Operation at the physical layer

3. Data Link Layer


3.1.
3.2.
3.3.
3.4.
3.5.
3.6.
3.7.
3.8.

Functions of the data link layer


Ethernet physical layer
Ethernet operation
Ethernet frame format
Ethernet switching
VLANs defined
VLAN application
Interrogator-VLAN forwarding

4. Network Layer Routing Operations


4.1.
4.2.
4.3.
4.4.
4.5.

Functions of the network layer


IP Routing and forwarding
Open Shortest Path First (OSPF)
Border Gateway Protocol (BGP)
The relationship between Layer 3 and
Layer 2

5.5. Dynamic Host Configuration


Protocol (DHCP)
5.6. Domain Name Service (DNS)

6. Transport Layer
6.1. Transport layer functions
6.2. Transmission Control Protocol
(TCP)
6.3. User Datagram Protocol (UDP)
6.4. Stream Control Transmission
Protocol (SCTP)

7. Application Layer
7.1. Application layer functions
7.2. Internet access
7.3. VoLTE
7.4. SIP and SDP
7.5. Media path and voice
7.6. RTP and RTCP in VoLTE
7.7. Adding video to a voice call
7.8. Enterprise VoIP telephony
7.9. Video streaming
7.10. Mobile networks

5. Network Layer IPv4 and IPv6


5.1.
5.2.
5.3.
5.4.

Layer 3 challenges
IPv4 and IPv6 header
IP address types
IP addresses and subnets

2015 Award
AwardSolutions,
Solutions,Inc.
Inc. www.awardsolutions.com
and Vodafone Technology Academy
2015
+1.972.664.0727

v1.0

75

Ethernet Backhaul Essentials

Instructor Led | Duration: 1 Day | Course Number: IPC_102


Executives, directors, program and project managers as well as sales and marketing professionals involved in 3G and 4G networks can benefit from a good
understanding of the terminology as well as concepts and technologies for IP/Ethernet backhaul. Two fundamental changes result from 3G and 4G networks
having a significant impact on backhaul: Trend toward an all IP network and the huge growth in the traffic over the air interface. With T1/E1 leased lines,
backhaul is no longer economical, so new backhaul solutions are being deployed. This course provides an overview of the various backhaul solutions and
related technologies, and describes the backhaul network architecture along with reviewing technologies. A backhaul technology migration scenario is
presented, and the course ends with discussion of the impact of the new IP backhaul.

Course Outline

Intended Audience
This course is designed for executives, directors, supervisors,
program/project managers as well as sales and marketing professionals
involved in the IP/Ethernet backhaul solutions.

Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to:

List the requirements for 3G/4G backhaul


Describe the challenges for 3G/4G backhaul
Sketch the 3G/4G IP backhaul deployment architecture
Differentiate between the access and aggregation networks
Discuss the role of various technologies in backhaul networks
Explain benefits of IP/MPLS and list various services provided for
backhaul
Explain benefits of carrier Ethernet and list various services
provided for backhaul
Differentiate between L2 and L3 EBH solutions
Show details of packet encapsulations between tower and MTSO
Explain how subnets, VLANs, static routes, VRRP, BFD, MPLS all
work together to create a complete and reliable solution
Connect the LTE layer with the EBH layer

1. LTE and EBH Motivation


1.1. Motivation
1.2. End-to-end network architecture
1.3. Possible EBH solutions

2. L2 Backhaul Solution
2.1.
2.2.
2.3.
2.4.
2.5.

L2 backhaul architecture
VLANs, subnets
Static routes
Use of MPLS in backhaul
2G, 3G and LTE paths

3. L3 Backhaul Solution
3.1.
3.2.
3.3.
3.4.
3.5.

L3 backhaul architecture
VLANs, subnets
Static routes
Use of OSPF in backhaul
2G, 3G and LTE paths

4. IP/MPLS Technology
4.1.
4.2.
4.3.
4.4.
4.5.

Key benefits
MPLS AToM/Pseudowire
VPWS/VPLS/H-VPLS
QoS support
Application in backhaul

5.4. QoS support


5.5. Application in backhaul

6. LTE Operations Essentials


6.1. End-to-end session setup
6.2. Signaling between eNodeB, MME
and S-GW

7. eNodeB to MTSO Packet-Flow


Exercise
7.1. Sketch packet headers and
encapsulations for L2 solution
7.2. Sketch packet headers and
encapsulations for L3 solutions

8. eNodeB to MTSO Redundancy


Exercise
8.1. Failure detection
8.2. Routing due to failures
8.3. Packet forwarding to alternate
paths

5. Metro/Carrier Ethernet Technology


and Operations
5.1. Key benefits
5.2. Circuit over Ethernet
5.3. Synchronization over Ethernet
76

2015 Award
Award
Solutions,
Inc.www.awardsolutions.com
www.awardsolutions.com+1.972.664.0727
+1.972.664.0727
2015
Solutions,
Inc.

v1.2

Exploring Ethernet Backhaul

Instructor Led | Duration: 2 Days | Course Number: IPC_205


The 4th generation (4G) of wireless technologies promises a much higher air interface data rate (over 100 Mbps) to users while reducing the cost per bit for
wireless service providers. The current T1/E1 backhaul will not be able to support the high data rate with reasonable costs. The backhaul is already becoming
the bottleneck in the existing 3G networks and will continue to be a challenge for emerging 4G networks. These networks require IP based broadband
backhaul solutions. This course provides the background and solutions for IP backhaul planning for 3G/4G radio networks, starting with a review of the trends
in 3G/4G wireless data services and related backhaul challenges. An overview of IP/MPLS is given since it is seen as an emerging technology for backhaul
operation. Finally, deployment considerations and a backhaul migration path are discussed along with an exercise to calculate backhaul requirements.

Intended Audience

This course is designed for those involved in planning, design and


engineering of 3G/4G backhaul systems. It is suitable for backhaul
network engineers and managers involved in deployment and operation of
3G/4G networks.

1. LTE and EBH Motivation


1.1. Motivation
1.2. End-to-end network architecture
1.3. Possible EBH solutions

2. L2 Backhaul Solution

Learning Objectives

After completing this course, the student will be able to:


List the requirements and challenges for 3G/4G backhaul
List 3G/4G wireless network backhaul options
Compare different backhaul facilities and explain the pros and cons
of the available solutions
Discuss the role of these key technologies from a backhaul
perspective, their operations and support: ATM, TDM, MPLS, Carrier
Ethernet and IP
Sketch the 2G/3G/4G integrated IP/Ethernet backhaul deployment
architecture with full redundancy
Compare key traditional and packet based timing and
synchronization methods such as IEEE 1588
Apply the end-to-end QoS concepts in IP and Ethernet integrated
backhaul and their usage in SLA monitoring
Calculate protocol overhead for various backhaul options for voice,
Web, video, etc.
Utilize traffic models to forecast backhaul requirements and
calculate link bandwidths
Explain backhaul/Ethernet testing scenarios with RFC 2544 and
Y.1731 in-network testing

Suggested Prerequisites

Course Outline

Basic knowledge of transport such as T1/E1 and SONET/SDH

2.1.
2.2.
2.3.
2.4.
2.5.

L2 backhaul architecture
VLANs, subnets
Static routes
Use of MPLS in backhaul
2G, 3G and LTE paths

3. L3 Backhaul Solution
3.1.
3.2.
3.3.
3.4.
3.5.

L3 backhaul architecture
VLANs, subnets
Static routes
Use of OSPF in backhaul
2G, 3G and LTE paths

4. Metro/Carrier E Technology and


Operations
4.1.
4.2.
4.3.
4.4.
4.5.

Motivation and benefits


Network architecture
Service types
Service attributes
Circuit emulation CESoPSN

5. Ethernet Backhaul Network Design


Considerations
5.1.
5.2.
5.3.
5.4.

6. QoS, Timing and SLA


6.1. 2G/3G/LTE backhaul traffic
profiles
6.2. End-to-end QoS support
6.3. Timing and synchronization
6.4. Packet mode timing IEEE 1588v2
6.5. OAM and performance metrics
6.6. SLA administration and
monitoring

7. Ethernet Backhaul Network Testing


and Deployment
7.1. Backhaul network testing with
RFC2544
7.2. Backhaul network turn-up
7.3. Network level testing with Y.1731
7.4. E-OAM and CFM

8. Ethernet Backhaul Network


Planning
8.1. Network planning overview
8.2. Capacity planning issues
8.3. Backhaul technology selection
criteria
8.4. Traffic forecast and modeling
8.5. Bandwidth/capacity computation

IP network routing/operations
Layer 2 and 3 design aspects
Redundancy in the backhaul network
Availability and resiliency

2015Award
Award
Solutions,
Inc.www.awardsolutions.com
www.awardsolutions.com+1.972.664.0727
+1.972.664.0727
2015
Solutions,
Inc.

v1.4

77

Ethernet Backhaul Planning

Instructor Led | Duration: 3 Days | Course Number: IPC_301


The 4th generation (4G) of wireless technologies promises a much higher air interface data rate (over 100 Mbps) to users. Delivering such high data rates requires a
very fast and efficient backhaul network. The current T1/E1 backhaul cannot support such high data rate with reasonable costs. These broadband networks require
all-IP and Ethernet based broadband backhaul solutions. The first two days of this course explore various technology options and architectures for Ethernet backhaul
solutions, including MPLS, Metro Ethernet over fiber, copper and microwave radio deployments. The third day introduces various planning tools needed for multimedia
network planning. This requires a management network capably of viewing the applications network as a system rather that a series of network elements. The course
focuses on demonstrating methods for estimating the backhaul requirements based on the type of geography served, expected adoption of new networks and traffic
models for key applications. This is demonstrated through a detailed capacity planning exercise using Excel spreadsheets provided to the participants.

Intended Audience

This course is designed for those involved in planning, design and engineering
of 3G/4G backhaul systems. It is suitable for those who want to learn various
strategies for sizing and deploying Ethernet backhaul.

Learning Objectives

After completing this course, the student will be able to:

List the requirements and challenges for 3G/4G backhaul and wireless
network backhaul options along with comparing different backhaul
facilities and explain the pros and cons of the available solutions
Discuss the role of these key technologies from a backhaul perspective,
their operations and support: ATM, TDM, MPLS, Carrier Ethernet and IP
Sketch the 2G/3G/4G integrated IP/Ethernet backhaul deployment
architecture
Compare key traditional and packet based timing and synchronization
methods such as IEEE 1588
Describe the evolution of todays TDM-based backhaul to tomorrows
Ethernet-based backhaul
Apply the end-to-end QoS concepts in IP and Ethernet integrated backhaul
and their usage in SLA monitoring
Demonstrate how reliability analysis is used to achieve network
availability requirements
Outline the basic tasks in estimating backhaul capacity requirements for
multimedia services
Apply diffusion modeling techniques to forecast subscriber mixes
Apply traffic modeling to estimate throughput requirements and oversubscription factors and use results to estimate IP backhaul link
capacities required to meet stated QoS requirements

Required Equipment

78

1. The Big Picture


1.1.
1.2.
1.3.
1.4.

IP convergence
Evolving radio technology
2G/3G/4G backhaul architecture
IP Backhaul requirements

2. Wireless Network Backhaul Options


2.1.
2.2.
2.3.
2.4.
2.5.

Overview of wireless backhaul


Key Ethernet transport options
Access network alternatives
Aggregation network alternatives
Global deployment landscape

3. Overview of ATM
3.1.
3.2.
3.3.
3.4.

ATM fundamentals
ATM adaptation layer
ATM QoS
IMA for wireless backhaul

4. MPLS Technology Overview


4.1.
4.2.
4.3.
4.4.

IP fundamentals for MPLS


IP routing and forwarding
MPLS fundamentals
L2VPNs
4.4.1. Pseudowires
4.4.2. VPLS; H-VPLS
4.5. L3VPNs

5. Microwave Technology Overview

PC laptop supporting Microsoft Excel

Suggested Prerequisites

Course Outline

IP Convergence Essentials (Instructor Led)


Basic knowledge of telecommunications (T1/E1, SONET/SDH, etc.)
Basic understanding of data networking concepts such as IP routing
and protocol stacks

5.1. Benefits and challenges on


microwave
5.2. Deployment topologies
5.3. When to use/avoid
5.4. Microwave planning considerations

2015 Award
Award
Solutions,
Inc.www.awardsolutions.com
www.awardsolutions.com+1.972.664.0727
+1.972.664.0727
2015
Solutions,
Inc.

6. Ethernet-Based Backhaul Solutions


6.1.
6.2.
6.3.
6.4.
6.5.
6.6.
6.7.

Ethernet basics
Carrier Ethernet (CE) defined
Ethernet Services Model (ESM)
CE service attributes
Circuit bonding
Circuit emulation over Ethernet
Timing considerations

7. Wireless Backhaul Evolution


Scenario
7.1. 2G./3G/4G backhaul basics
7.2. TDM to Ethernet evolution
scenario

8. Capacity Planning for Multimedia


Wireless Backhaul
8.1. Network planning overview
8.2. Capacity planning issues
8.3. Overview of wireless multimedia
backhaul planning
8.4. Traffic characterization
8.5. Effective bandwidth
8.6. Subscriber forecasting

9. Mini-Backhaul Capacity Planning


Workshop - Exercises
9.1. Exercise scenario description
9.2. Exercise plan
9.2.1. Subscriber forecasting
9.2.2. Subscriber characterization
9.2.3. Traffic modeling
9.2.4. Traffic geography
9.2.5. Effective bandwidth
v1.2

IP Networking Workshop for LTE

Instructor Led (Hands-On) | Duration: 4 Days | Course Number: IPC_405


As IP and related technologies make their way into wireless service offerings and into the mobility network architecture and operations, network staff will need
to have a solid understanding of these technologies in order to continue meeting service and network performance objectives. Having this foundation of
knowledge enhances ones value to the organization and improves productivity and effectiveness when working with these new types of networking devices. In
this class, students will learn the supported features of new vendor equipment and how best to operate them, as well as to recognize how configuration
changes affect other systems, diagnose performance issues, and trace fault conditions to their source. This session focuses on IP fundamentals: routing,
protocols, addressing and tools. Hands-on exercises are designed to reinforce these concepts in the context of the HSPA+/LTE network architecture.

Intended Audience

Course Outline

This course is intended for those familiar with the UMTS/HSPA+/LTE


wireless networks, but are relatively new to IP technologies. It is designed
to be a very compact IP course for those who may not necessarily need
industry accreditation.

1. Prologue

1.1. The wireless network


1.2. IP in the wireless network
1.3. IP workshop introduction

2. Internetworking Fundamentals

Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to:

Read and explain the configuration file on the router


Configure Ethernet VLANs and OSPF based IP networks
Use a network analyzer to trace packet flows through the network
Configure network nodes to support QoS requirements
Troubleshoot simple Ethernet and IP issues
Trace an end-to-end packet flow through the various VLANs and IP
subnets that make up the mobility network
Describe how Ethernet and IP nodes provide resiliency to faults in
the mobility network
Sketch a typical end-to-end LTE and HSPA+ architectures and
explain how traffic and management plane traffic flow through it
Estimate the number of IP addresses and subnets used by the
HSPA+/LTE platforms and formulate an IP addressing scheme

Suggested Prerequisites
Welcome to IP Networking (eLearning) or equivalent prior knowledge

2.1.
2.2.
2.3.
2.4.

OSI and Internet models


Headers and encapsulation
Network devices: Switch, Router
Internetworking in mobile networks

3. Ethernet LANs
3.1.
3.2.
3.3.
3.4.

Ethernet MAC layer and framing


Ethernet PHY: 10/FE/GE/10GE
Address resolution protocol
Lab: Wireshark

4. VLANs
4.1. Conceptual overview
4.2. Applications
4.3. Lab: VLANs (simulate control and
management planes)

5. IP Addressing
5.1. Broadcast, unicast, and multicast
addresses
5.2. Public and private addresses
5.3. Static and dynamic addresses
5.4. IP subnet masks and prefixes
5.5. Written lab: Subnets

6. Internet Protocol Operation


6.1. IP packet format
6.2. IP forwarding

2015 Award
AwardSolutions,
Solutions,Inc.
Inc. www.awardsolutions.com
www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727
+1.972.664.0727
2015

6.3.
6.4.
6.5.
6.6.

IP routing and OSPF


Name resolution
ICMP functions
Lab: IP forwarding

7. Transport Layer
7.1. Ports
7.2. TCP, UDP, SCTP
7.3. Lab: Log analysis for TCP

8. Mobility
8.1.
8.2.
8.3.
8.4.

Packet core architecture


Authentication
Tunneling for mobility
Lab: Simulated data session

9. Quality of Service (QoS)


9.1.
9.2.
9.3.
9.4.

IP QoS
MPLS QoS
Ethernet QoS
Lab: QoS and priority

10. Network Availability


10.1. Layer 2 solutions
10.2. Layer 3 solutions
10.3. Written lab: Failover

11. Putting It All Together


11.1. Interconnecting networks
11.1.1. Use of Ethernet
11.1.2. Use of IP
11.1.3. Use of MPLS

12. Basic Troubleshooting


12.1. Lab: Ethernet misconfiguration
12.2. Lab: IP misconfiguration
v2.3

79

IP Networking Workshop for 4G Backhaul


Instructor Led (Hands-on) | Duration: 4 Days | Course Number: IPC_406

With significantly increased air interface throughput offered by the 4G wireless networks, backhaul networks are migrating from traditional TDM (T1/E1) to Ethernet
Backhaul (EBH). The replacement of T1/E1 backhaul by EBH backhaul offers a more efficient and cost effective solution, and provides a more future proof backhaul
network. This new backhaul paradigm requires the service provider to have a thorough understanding of the EBH supporting technologies such as IP, Ethernet
networking, VLANs, etc. This workshop provides the necessary background for each of these technologies and through hands-on exercises demonstrates how the
technologies are applied in the EBH network. The student will learn the basic IP, Ethernet and VLAN concepts (routing, protocols, addressing, EVCs, and tools, then
apply these in a series of hands-on labs using a simulated EBH network. These labs will enable the student to apply the concepts, by building their own EBH network
modeled after a real world wireless Ethernet Backhaul network. Though an end-to-end view will be presented, the workshop will focus on a cell site view of EBH.

Intended Audience

Workshop Outline

This workshop is intended for those familiar with the 2G/3G TDM
backhaul, but are relatively new to Ethernet backhaul and an all IP RAN. It
is a compact IP workshop for those who work on the wireless backhaul.

Learning Objectives
After completing this workshop, the student will be able to:
Read and explain the Configuration file on a router.
Isolate and troubleshoot simple Ethernet and IP issues.
Sketch a typical Ethernet Backhaul (EBH) architecture to meet
3G/4G backhaul challenges.
Describe how signaling, user and management traffic flows through
the EBH network.
Sketch the VLANs in the EBH and their mapping to EVCs.
Configure Ethernet VLANs and OSPF based IP networks.
Use a network analyzer to trace packet flows through the network.
Trace an packet flow through the various VLANs and IP subnets that
make up the 4G backhaul network.
Describe how Ethernet and IP nodes provide resiliency to faults in
the 4G EBH.
Estimate the number of IP addresses and subnets used by the 4G
backhaul platforms and formulate an IP addressing scheme.

Suggested Prerequisites
Welcome to IP Networking (eLearning) or equivalent prior knowledge

Special Note
This workshop includes customer provided configuration files (where available) to
enhance the exercises with actual implementation details.
80

1. Prologue

1.1. IP convergence
1.2. LTE network architecture
1.3. The workshop

2. Packet Switching
2.1.
2.2.
2.3.
2.4.

Circuit vs. Packet


IP networking protocol layers
TCP/IP protocol model
Hosts, hubs, switches and routers

3. Ethernet LANs
3.1.
3.2.
3.3.
3.4.

Ethernet frame format


Ethernet operations
Spanning tree protocol
Additional features

4. VLANS
4.1. VLANs defined
4.2. VLAN applications
4.3. Multi-Layer Switch (MLS)

5. IP Addressing

7. The Transport Layer


7.1. Transmission control protocol
7.2. User datagram protocol
7.3. Stream control transmission
protocol

8. Mobility
8.1. Adding mobility support to IP
8.2. IP mobility in LTE networks

9. Quality of Service
9.1. QoS defined
9.2. Problems and solutions
9.3. QoS with protocols: IP, MPLS, and
Ethernet

10. Network Availability


10.1. Availability concepts
10.2. Layer 2 redundancy
10.3. Layer 3 redundancy

11. Putting it All Together


11.1. Roles of Ethernet

5.1. IP address route-ability


5.2. Subnetting
5.3. Special IP addresses

6. Internet Protocol Operation


6.1.
6.2.
6.3.
6.4.
6.5.
6.6.
6.7.

Key IP characteristics
IP forwarding
DNS
Address resolution protocol
IP routing
The IP header
Basic troubleshooting tools

2015 Award
AwardSolutions,
Solutions,Inc.
Inc. www.awardsolutions.com
www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727
+1.972.664.0727
2015

v2.4

Exploring IP Routing and Ethernet Bridging


Instructor Led | Duration: 2 Days | Course Number: IPC_207

IP Convergence is the key enabler for wireless, wire-line, cable and enterprise networks of the future. In-depth understanding of Interconnection of IP and
Ethernet networks is essential for those designing, operating and monitoring large complex carrier networks. This course focuses on technologies and
protocols used to connect different IP networks and Ethernet LAN segments to create large and complex IP networks using both Ethernet switching (Layer 2)
and IP/MPLS routing (Layer 3). The course covers IP routing Protocols such as OSPF and BGPv4, as well as Ethernet bridging protocols STP, RSTP, MSTP and
PVSTP+. In addition, the use of MPLS to interconnect networks through Layer 3 Virtual Private Networks (L3VPN) is covered in the course.

Intended Audience

Course Outline

This course is intended for those who are engaged in planning, operating
and monitoring complex IP/Ethernet networks.

Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to:
Sketch/configure Ethernet bridging solutions with L2 protocols such
as MSTP
Implement L2 redundancy using MSTP
Explain IP routing concepts
Implement basic multi-area OSPF routed networks
Detail the functions and the usage of the BGPv4 protocol
Implement BGP routed VPN solution
Isolate routing amongst different VRFs
List and explain key routing issues
Sketch how OSPF and BGP routing protocols and STP come together
in a 3G/4G wireless network
Troubleshoot basic routing failures

Suggested Prerequisites
IP Networking Workshop (Instructor Led)

1. Prologue
1.1. Routing and switching in 4G an
end-to-end view
1.2. The lab configuration

2. Spanning Tree Protocol


2.1. Concepts
2.2. Rapid STP (RSTP)
2.3. Multiple STP (MSTP)

3. The Routing Table


3.1.
3.2.
3.3.
3.4.
3.5.
3.6.
3.7.

How to read a routing table


Administrative distance
Longest match rule
Equal cost multiple path
Recursive searches
Troubleshooting black holes
Redistribution

4. OSPF Key Concepts


4.1. OSPF areas
4.2. Router types
4.3. Link state advertisements

5. OSPF in Wireless Networks


5.1.
5.2.
5.3.
5.4.

Neighbor discovery
Adjacencies
Database synchronization
End-to-end scenarios
5.4.1. Route propagation
5.4.2. Traffic flows

2015 Award
AwardSolutions,
Solutions,Inc.
Inc.www.awardsolutions.com
www.awardsolutions.com+1.972.664.0727
+1.972.664.0727
2015

6. BGPv4 Key Concepts


6.1. iBGP and eBGP
6.2. Route reflectors
6.3. Confederations

7. BGPv4 in Wireless Networks


7.1. Route manipulation using BGP
attributes
7.2. BGP communities
7.3. BGP path determination

8. L3 VPNs in Wireless Networks


8.1. Interconnecting MTSOs
8.2. Architecture
8.3. High level operations

9. L3VPN Routing
9.1. Provider/customer model
9.2. VPN Routing and Forwarding
(VRF)
9.3. VPN route distribution
9.4. VPN-IPv4 address family
9.5. Route distinguishers
9.6. Route targets

10. Putting it all together


10.1. End-to-end routing
10.2. End-to-end traffic
10.3. Routing issues
10.3.1. Route flapping
10.3.2. Convergence

v2.1

81

IP Routing and Ethernet Bridging Workshop


Instructor Led (Hands-On) | Duration: 4 Days | Course Number: IPC_407

IP Convergence is the key enabler for wireless, wire-line, cable and enterprise networks of the future. In-depth understanding of Interconnection of IP and
Ethernet networks is essential for those designing, operating and monitoring large complex carrier networks. This course focuses on technologies and
protocols used to connect different IP networks and Ethernet LAN segments to create large and complex IP networks using both Ethernet switching (Layer 2)
and IP/MPLS routing (Layer 3). The course covers IP routing Protocols such as OSPF and BGPv4, as well as Ethernet bridging protocols STP, RSTP, MSTP and
PVSTP+. In addition, the use of MPLS to interconnect networks through Layer 3 Virtual Private Networks (L3VPN) is covered in the course. Appropriate handson exercises are included in the course to supplement the theory.

Intended Audience

Course Outline

This course is intended for those who are engaged in planning, operating
and monitoring complex IP/Ethernet networks.

Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to:
Sketch/Configure Ethernet bridging solutions with L2 protocols such
as MSTP
Implement L2 redundancy using MSTP
Explain IP Routing concepts
Implement basic multi-area OSPF routed networks
Detail the functions and the usage of the BGPv4 Protocol
Implement BGP routed VPN solution
Isolate routing amongst different VRFs
List and explain key routing issues
Sketch how OSPF & BGP routing protocols and STP come together
in a 3G/4G wireless network
Troubleshoot basic routing failures

Suggested Prerequisites
IP Networking Workshop (Instructor Led)

1.1. Routing and switching in 4G An


end-to-end view
1.2. The lab configuration

2. Spanning Tree Protocol


2.1.
2.2.
2.3.
2.4.

Concepts
Rapid STP (RSTP)
Multiple STP (MSTP)
Lab: L2 redundancy

3. The Routing Table


3.1.
3.2.
3.3.
3.4.
3.5.
3.6.
3.7.
3.8.

How to read a routing table


Administrative distance
Longest match rule
Equal cost multiple path
Recursive searches
Troubleshooting black holes
Redistribution
Lab: Static and default routing

4. OSPF Key Concepts


4.1. OSPF areas
4.2. Router types
4.3. Link state advertisements

5. OSPF in Wireless Networks

Special Note
The participants will do hands-on labs throughout the course to exercise key
concepts.

82

1. Prologue

5.1.
5.2.
5.3.
5.4.

Neighbor discovery
Adjacencies
Database synchronization
End-to-end scenarios
5.4.1. Route propagation
5.4.2. Traffic flows
5.5. Routing lab: OSPF in wireless

2015 Award
AwardSolutions,
Solutions,Inc.
Inc. www.awardsolutions.com
www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727
+1.972.664.0727
2015

6. L3 VPNs in Wireless
6.1. Interconnecting MTSOs
6.2. Architecture
6.3. High level operations

7. BGPv4 Key Concepts


7.1. iBGP and eBGP
7.2. Route reflectors
7.3. Confederations

8. BGPv4 in Wireless Networks


8.1. Route manipulation using BGP
attributes
8.2. BGP communities
8.3. BGP path determination

9. L3VPN Routing
9.1. Provider/customer model
9.2. VPN Routing and Forwarding
(VRF)
9.3. VPN route distribution
9.4. VPN-IPv4 address family
9.5. Route distinguishers
9.6. Route targets

10. Putting it all together


10.1. End-to-end routing
10.2. End-to-end traffic
10.3. Routing issues
10.3.1. Route flapping
10.3.2. Convergence
10.4. Troubleshooting lab

v2.0

Exploring IPv6

Instructor Led | Duration: 1 Day | Course Number: IPC_202


The roots of the current Internet stretch back over twenty years to its beginnings in academic institutions. The fact that it has been able to adapt and scale to
todays global network is a testament to the solid design principles used in its creation. However, as the number of Internet nodes continues to grow and new
demands are placed on it by evolving cellular wireless networks, the current IPv4-NAT architecture no longer suffices and we must consider a transition to an
updated protocol. This course explores the IPv6 protocol, which brings not only a vast address space to address millions of billions of network nodes but also a
bag of new tricks. Streamlined and simplified, IPv6 incorporates a number of companion protocols into its core specification. This course covers these general
topics as well as the adoption of IPv6 in next generation 3GPP and 3GPP2 wireless services.

Course Outline

Intended Audience
This is an introductory course and does not assume any previous
knowledge of IPv6. It is suitable for wireless professionals who want to gain
an awareness of IPv4s real limitations, the key issues with IPv6s new
capabilities, and how to transition the networks.

1. Introduction

Learning Objectives

2. IPv6 Headers

After completing this course, the student will be able to:

Discuss the different requirements of an IP network


Analyze the limitations of IPv4 networks
List the key aspects of IPv6
Sketch the IPv6 addressing architecture and the new types of IP
addresses
Describe the Plug-n-Play capabilities of IPv6
Describe wireless mobility solutions in IPv6
Identify the impact of IPv6 on related protocols
Describe the use of IPv6 in 3G/4G wireless networks

1.1. IP-based networks


1.2. Current state of IPv4
1.3. Key aspects of IPv6
2.1. Disadvantages of IPv4 header
options
2.2. Extension header
2.3. Routing header
2.4. Destination/Hop-by-hop header
2.5. QoS features

6. Interworking IPv4 and IPv6


6.1. Impact of IPv4 to IPv6 transition
6.2. Interworking IPv4 and IPv6
6.3. Deployment scenarios of IPv6

7. Wireless Mobility in IPv6


7.1.
7.2.
7.3.
7.4.
7.5.

Mobility management essentials


Mobile IP solution
IPv6 mobility solution
Key mobility messages
IPv6 in 3GPP and 3GPP2

3. IPv6 Addressing Architecture


3.1.
3.2.
3.3.
3.4.
3.5.

Current IPv4 addressing limitations


Address formats of IPv6
Multicast addresses
New address category (Anycast)
Fragment header

4. Plug n Play Aspects of IPv6


4.1.
4.2.
4.3.
4.4.

Host configuration
Stateless auto-configuration
Neighbor discovery
Stateful auto-configuration

5. IPv6 Impact on Other Protocols


5.1. Pseudo header
5.2. DNS for IPv6
5.3. DHCPv6

2015
2015 Award
AwardSolutions,
Solutions,Inc.
Inc. www.awardsolutions.com
www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727
+1.972.664.0727

v1.6

83

IPv6 Networking Workshop for LTE Networks


Instructor Led (Hands-On) | Duration: 3 Days | Course Number: IPC_409

IP has permeated all facets of the LTE wireless network. In the services realm, the LTE network provides Internet access, Virtual Private Network (VPN) and
Voice over IP (VoIP) services, in addition to innumerable multimedia and web-based applications. The underlying transport networks, including backhaul and
backbone networks, also rely heavily on IP and related technologies such as Ethernet and MPLS. It is therefore difficult to understate the magnitude of the
impact that the transition to IPv6 will have on the LTE wireless network infrastructure. This course examines how IPv6 will be used in the LTE wireless service
provider network. It presents the significant features of the new protocol, including addressing, routing, mobility and security. It uses practically-oriented
exercises to illustrate how the LTE mobility network may support a mix of IPv4-based and IPv6-based applications and, furthermore, how they may be carried
over a mix of IPv4-based and IPv6-based transports.

Course Outline

Intended Audience
This course is intended for those familiar with the use of IP in wireless
networks, but are new to IPv6.

Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to:
Illustrate, for example, how the LTE mobility nodes may use IPv6
while the legacy 2G/3G mobility nodes continue to use IPv4.
Use tools such as ping and traceroute to test connectivity in IPv6
networks.
Compare and contrast IPv4 and IPv6 protocols
DNS, DHCP, ICPMP
OSPF, BGP
Illustrate how the mobility nodes forward a users IPv6 packet
through an IPv4 transport network.
Illustrate how the mobility nodes forward a users IPv4 packet
through an IPv6 transport network.
Recognize and interpret IPv6 addresses.
Explain how IPv6 plug-and-play features simplify network
administration.
Illustrate how IPv6 packets are transported over and MPLS/IPv4
network

Suggested Prerequisites
IP Networking Workshop (Instructor Led)

84

1. IPv6 and LTE


1.1.
1.2.
1.3.
1.4.
1.5.

IP in LTE networks
IPv6-based applications
IPv6-based transport
EPS bearers
Lab: Introduction to the workshop

2. IPv6 Addresses
2.1.
2.2.
2.3.
2.4.
2.5.

Address formats of IPv6


Neighbor discovery
ICMPv6
Multicast addresses
Lab: Link-local operations

3. Address Assignment and Neighbor


Discovery
3.1. Host configuration
3.2. Stateless auto-configuration
3.3. DHCPv6 and stateful autoconfiguration
3.4. Lab: IPv6 address assignment

5. IPv6 Routing for LTE Transport


5.1.
5.2.
5.3.
5.4.

IPv6 routing tables


MP-BGP
OSPFv3
Lab: IPv6 transport

6. Transition to IPv6
6.1. IPv6 Provider Edge (6PE)
6.2. IPv6 VPN Provider Edge (6VPE)
6.3. Lab: Troubleshooting
Note: The lab exercises may be
customized based on the target
audiences own plans for supporting
IPv6.

4. IPv6 User Plane and Dual-Stack


Operation
4.1.
4.2.
4.3.
4.4.
4.5.
4.6.
4.7.

Dual-stack solutions
DNS for IPv6
Static and connected routes
Fragment header
Address management
Mobility support
Lab: Dual-stack operations

2015 Award
AwardSolutions,
Solutions,Inc.
Inc. www.awardsolutions.com
www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727
+1.972.664.0727
2015

v1.5

Network
Transformation
One of the key changes in communication networks is an evolution toward Virtualization and Cloud-based networks. Award Solutions Network
Transformation curriculum focuses on providing courses to help prepare individuals for getting a grasp on tomorrows cloud-based networks and
offers a wide variety of technology insights to meet every need: Big Data, Cloud Computing Service Models, SDN, OpenFlow, and Network Functions
Virtualization (NFV).

SELF-PACED eLEARNING COURSES

*[NWTF101] Welcome to SDN (e) *NEW


*[NWTF102] Welcome to Virtualization (e) *NEW
*[NWTF104] Welcome to Mobile CSP Network Transformation (e) *NEW
*[NWTF105] SDN Overview (e) *NEW
*[NWTF106] NFV Overview (e) *NEW
*[NWTF107] OpenStack Cloud Overview (e) *NEW
*[NWTF108] API Overview (e) *NEW
*[NWTF109] Big Data Overview (e) *NEW

INSTRUCTOR LED COURSES

*[NWTF110] API Essentials *NEW


[NWTF103] Big Data Essentials
*Cloud Computing Fundamentals *NEW
*[NWTF705] Mobile CSP Network Architecture and Operations *NEW

[NWTF204] Exploring Network Transformations with Cloud, SDN, NFV, API and Big Data

* Software-Defined Networking (SDN) Essentials *NEW

*[NWTF704] Exploring Software-Defined Networking (SDN) for Network Operators *NEW

[NWTF402] Software-Defined Networking (SDN) Hands-on Workshop


*Software-Defined Networking (SDN) Troubleshooting Workshop *NEW
[NWTF203] Exploring Network Functions Virtualization (NFV)
*Exploring NFV as Application of OpenStack and SDN *NEW
*NFV Application Planning and Design Workshop *NEW
*NFV Troubleshooting Workshop *NEW
*OpenStack Cloud IaaS Essentials *NEW
[NWTF401] OpenStack Cloud Workshop
*Architecting and Building an OpenStack IaaS (Basic) *NEW

OpenStack Cloud Workshop Instructor Led Course

2015 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727

85

Welcome to SDN (Software-Defined Networks)


eLearning (H5) | Average Duration: 1 hour | Course Number: NWTF101

Software Defined Networking (SDN) is a relatively new concept within the industry and has recently gained traction. Standards and implementations of SDN
are still evolving as the industry grapples with this potentially significant technology transformation. SDN proposes to take the traditional implementation of
the networking protocol stack and dis-assemble its layers. It is a collection of technologies that splits the data, control and management planes of the
network. By doing this, the expectation is that it will improve network flexibility, manageability and allow the network administrator to customize the operations
of the network on a large scale. Recent developments and the use of virtualization and cloud computing are some key enablers of this transformation. This
eLearning provides a technical overview of Software Defined Networking (SDN).

Intended Audience

Knowledge Knuggets

This course is intended for technical personnel with a grounding in IP


networking who are seeking a technical overview of SDN (Software Defined
Networks).

Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to:

List the motivations for SDN


Define Software Defined Networks
List the competing standards for SDN
List the components of the SDN architecture
List the functions of SDN components
List two typical applications of SDN

1. Course Objectives
2. Introduction
2.1. What is SDN?
2.2. SDN concept
2.3. SDN benefits
2.4. SDN challenges
2.5. SDN and virtualization

3. SDN History and Standards


3.1. SDN history
3.2. SDN competing standards
3.3. Initiatives defining SDN
3.4. SDN and OpenFlow
3.5. SDN and Cloud Computing

4. SDN Architecture
4.1.
4.2.
4.3.
4.4.

SDN layers
SDN interfaces
SDN application scenarios
SDN washing

5. SDN Deployment
5.1. SDN and NFV
5.2. NFV motivations
5.3. SDN and NFV deployment
5.4. Network characteristics without SDN
or NFV
5.5. SDN deployment with other
technology trends

6. End of Course Assessment

86

2015 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com


www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727
+1.972.664.0727

v1.0

Welcome to Virtualization

eLearning (H5) | Average Duration: 1 hour | Course Number: NWTF102


The concept of Virtualization and Virtual Machines is a key enabler of a lot of the newer technologies and techniques in the computing and networking
industry. Cloud Computing (CC) is a multifaceted technology generally characterized by its Service Model (SM) type (SaaS, PaaS and IaaS). IaaS and PaaS are
Virtualization techniques for CC. SDN (Software Defined Networking) proposes to take the traditional implementation of the networking protocol stack and disassemble its layers. It is a collection of technologies that splits the data, control and management planes of the network by utilizing Virtualization. NFV
(Network Functions Virtualization) proposes to leverage standard IT virtualization technology to consolidate network equipment types onto industry standard
high volume servers, switches and storage. This eLearning provides a technical overview of Virtualization.

Intended Audience

Knowledge Knuggets

This course is intended for technical personnel with a grounding in IP


networking who are seeking a technical overview of Virtualization.

Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to:

List the motivations for Virtualization


Describe the concept of Virtualization
Describe Virtualization of Computing
Describe Virtualization of Networking
Describe the types of Virtualization
List some important uses of Virtualization

1. Concepts of Virtualization
1.1.
1.2.
1.3.
1.4.
1.5.
1.6.

Course objectives
Intro - Alice in Wonderland
The Hypervisor
Virtual reality games
Email retrieval
Summary

5. Virtualization of Storage
5.1. Device-based storage
5.2. Host-based storage
5.3. Network-based storage
5.4. Summary

6. End of Course Assessment

2. Types of Virtualization
2.1. Uses of Virtualization
2.2. Components of Virtualization
2.3. Server Virtualization
2.4. Storage Virtualization
2.5. Network Virtualization
2.6. Virtual Private Networking (VPN)

3. Virtualization of Servers
3.1. Introduction
3.2. History of Virtualization
3.3. Server Virtualization
3.4. Hypervisor types
3.5. Hypervisor role
3.6. Cloud Computing
3.7. Grid Computing

4. Virtualization of Networking
4.1.
4.2.
4.3.
4.4.
4.5.

Types of network Virtualization


Overlay networks
External network Virtualization
Internal network Virtualization
Software Defined Network (SDN)

2015 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727


+1.972.664.0727

v1.0

87

Welcome to Mobile CSP Network Transformation


eLearning (H5v) | Average Duration: 1 hour | Course Number: NWTF104

Mobile Communication Service Providers (CSPs) are on the cusp of a multitude of network and business transformation choices. A good conceptual
understanding of the new networking and CSP business paradigms is essential for professionals in the communication industry. This course provides a highlevel view of the impact and benefits of network transformation to mobile CSPs and the vision and opportunities created by future CSP networks, as well as
the role of transforming technologies such as SDN, NFV, API, Cloud, and Big Data to enhance network agility and scalability.

Intended Audience

Knowledge Knuggets

The course is intended for all that are interested in understanding how the
mobile CSP business and network will evolve over the next few years.

Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to:
List the financial and operational motivations for CSP network
transformation with NFV and SDN
Compare and contrast SDN and NFV
Communicate more effectively using SDN/NFV terminology
List key NFV/SDN deployment considerations
Illustrate how SDN/NFV interworks with other network
transformation technologies, such as Cloud, Big Data and APIs

1. Mobile CSP Organizational Structure


and Network Architecture

8. Summary
9. End of Course Assessment

2. Key Communications Technologies


and Their Roles in the CSP Network
3. End-to-End Data Session Setup Over
the 4G LTE Network
4. Motivations for CSP Network
Transformation
5. NFV and SDN
5.1. NFV
5.2. SDN
5.3. NFV and SDN together

6. Key NFV/SDN Deployment


Considerations
7. NFV/SDN Interworking with Cloud, Big
Data, and APIs

88

2014
www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727
+1.972.664.0727
2015 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com

v1.0

SDN Overview (coming soon)

eLearning (H5) | Average Duration: 1 hour | Course Number: NWTF105


Mobile Communication Service Providers (CSPs) are on the cusp of a multitude of network and business transformation choices. A good conceptual
understanding of the new networking and CSP business paradigms is essential for professionals in the communication industry. This course provides a high
level view of the impact and benefits of Software Defined Networks, the vision and opportunities created by future CSP networks, as well as a number of
example of how SDN could be used to provide services in a Transformed network.

Intended Audience

Knowledge Knuggets

The course is intended for all that are interested in understanding what
SDN is and how it will transform the CSP network over the next few years.

Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to:
Describe the concept of Software Defined Networks (SDN)
List the key components of the SDN architecture
Identify possible uses of SDN

1. SDN Overview
1.1. SDN: Centralized control, distributed
traffic
1.2. SDN defined

8. SDN Challenges
9. End of Course Assessment

2. SDN Motivations and Benefits


2.1. Motivation for SDN
2.2. Potential SDN benefits

3. Routing and Forwarding


3.1. Routing and forwarding
3.2. Routing in action
3.3. Forwarding in action
3.4. Control plane and forwarding plane
inside a router

4. SDN Principles
4.1. The SDN way
4.2. The Hybrid way

5. SDN Architecture
5.1. SDN architecture
5.2. SDN controller for flow rules
5.3. SDN switch for forwarding

6. SDN in Action
6.1. SDN flow rules in action
6.2. SDN forwarding in action

7. Using SDN
7.1. SDN: Hybrid approach
7.2. SDN: Bandwidth on demand service

2015 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727


+1.972.664.0727

v1.0

89

NFV Overview (coming soon)

eLearning (H5) | Average Duration: 1 hour | Course Number: NWTF106


Mobile Communication Service Providers (CSPs) are on the cusp of a multitude of network and business transformation choices. A good conceptual
understanding of the new networking and CSP business paradigms is essential for professionals in the communication industry. This course provides a high
level view of the impact and benefits of Network Functions Virtualization (NFV), the vision and opportunities created by future CSP networks, as well as a
number of example of how NFV could be used to provide services in a Transformed network.

Intended Audience

Knowledge Knuggets

The course is intended for all that are interested in understanding what
NFV is and how it will transform the CSP network over the next few years.

Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to:
Describe the concept of Network Functions Virtualization
List the motivations, challenges and impact of NFV
List the key components of the NFV architecture

1. NFV Overview
1.1. Network Functions Virtualization (NFV)
1.2. NFV defined

2. NFV Motivation and Benefits


2.1. Motivation for NFV
2.2. Potential NFV benefits

3. NFV Architectural Framework


3.1. NFV framework
3.2. High-level NFV framework

4. NFV Challenges
5. NFV and IMS
5.1. Simplified IMS functions
5.2. Virtualized IMS functions

6. NFV and LTE


7. NFV and Content Delivery Networks
8. NFV Examples
8.1. Hardware failure
8.2. NFV for elastic capacity

9. End of Course Assessment

90

2015 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com


www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727
+1.972.664.0727

v1.0

OpenStack Cloud Overview (coming soon)


eLearning (H5) | Average Duration: 1 hour | Course Number: NWTF107

Mobile Communication Service Providers (CSPs) are on the cusp of a multitude of network and business transformation choices. A good conceptual
understanding of the new networking and CSP business paradigms is essential for professionals in the communication industry. This course provides a high
level view of the impact and benefits of the cloud infrastructure, the benefits of virtualization, the vision and opportunities created by future CSP networks, as
well as an overview of the impact OpenStack cloud infrastructure on provide services network.

Intended Audience

Knowledge Knuggets

The course is intended for all that are interested in understanding what
OpenStack is and how it will transform the CSP network over the next few
years.

Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to:
Identify the main elements of virtualization
List the key components of cloud Infrastructure as a Service (IaaS)
Describe the role of Orchestration

1. Key Attributes of Cloud Computing


2. Virtualization
2.1. Why Virtualization?
2.2. A real world example Virtualization

3. Virtual Machine and Hypervisor


3.1. Virtual machine
3.2. The Hypervisor
3.3. Hypervisor defined

4. Functions of the Hypervisor


4.1. Functions of the Hypervisor
4.2. Networking in the virtual world

5. The Cloud
5.1. Why Cloud?
5.2. Multi-tenancy (users) in action

6. The Role of the Orchestrator


6.1. Cloud orchestration
6.2. Cloud Orchestration defined

7. OpenStack IaaS
7.1. OpenStack IaaS
7.2. OpenStack release timeline

8. OpenStack Architecture
8.1. Conceptual architecture
8.2. OpenStack IaaS at a Service Provider

9. End of Course Assessment

2015 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727


+1.972.664.0727

v1.0

91

API Overview (coming soon)

eLearning (H5) | Average Duration: 1 hour | Course Number: NWTF108


Mobile Communication Service Providers (CSPs) are on the cusp of a multitude of network and business transformation choices. A good conceptual
understanding of the new networking and CSP business paradigms is essential for professionals in the communication industry. This course provides a high
level view of the impact and benefits of Application Programing Interfaces, the vision and opportunities created by future CSP networks, as well as their role in
supporting communication across a transformed network.

Intended Audience

Knowledge Knuggets

The course is intended for all that are interested in understanding what
APIs are and how they will enable the transformation of the CSP network
over the next few years.

1. What is an API?

Learning Objectives

2. Why APIs?

After completing this course, the student will be able to:


Outline the concept of Application Programming Interfaces (APIs)
Describe how to leverage APIs as part of the Network
Transformation
Identify three possible examples of APIs

1.1. API defined


1.2. What is an API?
2.1. Benefits of APIs
2.2. Requirements of APIs

3. Using APIs
3.1. API In action: End-to-end view of API

4. API Process
4.1. Simplified API process

5. Technology Behind APIs


5.1. RESTful APIs
5.2. OAuth2

6. APIs and Network Transformation


6.1. APIs and network transformation
6.2. Example: OpenStack APIs for VM
Instantiation
6.3. Example: APIs in Software-Defined
Networking

7. API Examples
7.1. Data center example
7.2. Wireless network example
7.3. What is an API platform?

8. End of Course Assessment

92

2015 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com


www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727
+1.972.664.0727

v1.0

Big Data Overview (coming soon)

eLearning (H5) | Average Duration: 1 hour | Course Number: NWTF109


Mobile Communication Service Providers (CSPs) are on the cusp of a multitude of network and business transformation choices. A good conceptual
understanding of the new networking and CSP business paradigms is essential for professionals in the communication industry. This course provides a high
level view of the impact and benefits of Software Defined Networks, the vision and opportunities created by future CSP networks, as well as a number of
example of how SDN could be used to provide services in a Transformed network.

Intended Audience

Knowledge Knuggets

The course is intended for all that are interested in understanding what Big
Data is and how it will transform the CSP network over the next few years.

Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to:
Describe the concept of Big Data
Illustrate the Big Data architecture and key protocols
Describe a possible use case for Big Data

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.

What is Big Data?


Big Data Technology
Hadoop Procedure
Hadoop Modules
Insights
Data Visualization
Visualization Examples
Big Data Examples
End of Course Assessment

2014
+1.972.664.0727
2015 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727

v1.0

93

API Essentials

Instructor Led | Duration: 1 Day | Course Number: NWTF110


APIs provide access to network functionality (e.g. voice calls, SMS, MMS, uploading photos, videos) for third-party applications. Network operators are
increasingly publishing their APIs to create an ecosystem for application developers to leverage the operators infrastructure. Applications are generally
architected using a Service Oriented Architecture (SOA) or a Resource Oriented Architecture (ROA). SOA applications describe interfaces using WSDL and use
SOAP as the underlying protocol. ROA applications typically use the RESTful approach and communicate using HTTP. Data is typically exchanged across
applications in formats such as JSON, HTML, or XML. This course explains in simple terms, these fundamental architectures, technologies, and protocols and
also introduces the attendee to GSMAs OneAPI, an attempt to standardize APIs for the network.

Intended Audience

Course Outline

This is an introductory course for engineering, strategy, and marketing


personnel attempting to understand the terminology and technology
around APIs.

Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to:
Explain what an API is
Describe a few Use Cases for APIs
Describe Service Oriented Architecture and the role of SOAP and
WDSL
Describe Resource Oriented Architecture and the RESTful approach
Compare and contrast SOA and ROA
Describe various data exchange formats such as JSON, HTML, or
XML
Describe GSMAs OneAPI and the network functionality it makes
accessible to application programmers and communication service
providers (CSPs).

1. API Introduction
1.1. Communication industry business
Trends
1.2. API terminology
1.3. API purpose and benefits
1.4. APIs for service providers

2. API Use Cases


2.1. Examples of applications using APIs
2.2. Sample Use Cases in telecom
domain

3. Web Services and Architecture


3.1. Evolution of remote invocation
3.1.1. Remote Procedure Call (RPC)
3.1.2. Message Oriented Middleware
(MOM)
3.1.3. Service Oriented Architecture
(SOA)
3.1.4. Resource Oriented
Architecture (ROA)
3.1.5. Other: WebRTC and SIP
3.2. A closer look at SOA
3.3. A closer look at ROA

5. Data Exchange Formats


5.1.
5.2.
5.3.
5.4.

Introduction
HTML
XML
JSON

6. Example Application Using API


6.1. Sample application
6.2. Programming language choices
6.3. Development environment
choices
6.4. Protocol options
6.5. API options
6.6. End-to-end view

7. Standards and Deployment


7.1. GSMA OneAPI
7.2. Conform or create your own?
7.3. Deployment considerations

4. SOAP vs. REST


4.1. Main components of SOAP
4.2. Main components of REST
4.3. Comparing and contrasting SOAP
and REST
4.4. Using SOAP and REST
4.5. API design considerations

94

2015 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com


www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727
+1.972.664.0727

v1.0

Big Data Essentials

Instructor Led | Duration: 1 Day | Course Number: NWTF103


Big Data is a relatively new concept within the industry and has recently gained traction. Implementations of Big Data are still evolving as the industry grapples with
this potentially significant technology transformation. Several definitions of the term Big Data exist but most of the industry agrees that the concept essentially is
about the ability to capture, manage, analyze and correlate large amounts of varied structured and un-structured data very quickly without too much delay. This is
beyond the capability of traditional Relational Database Management Systems and needs a different approach from the perspective of Processes, Software, Hardware
and Analytics. As with any new field, several approaches exist but the Hadoop ecosystem of software seems to be the de-facto industry standard for this. The course
starts with a discussion of the industry landscape and the motivation behind using Big Data. This course describes the key concepts upon which Big Data is founded
and provides an overview of Hadoop, MapReduce and the Hadoop Ecosystem.

Intended Audience

Course Outline

This is a technical overview, intended for a technical audience that has


knowledge of packet networking and an interest in understanding key
concepts in Big Data.

Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to:

Describe Big Data


List the motivations for Big Data
Discuss the key concepts of Big Data
List the various Hadoop Components
Describe Hadoop
Discuss the Hadoop Ecosystem
Describe MapReduce
Explain the role of MapReduce
Describe HDFS
Explain the role of HDFS
List the components of Hadoop Common
List the key players in the Big Data industry

1. Background and Motivation


1.1. Industry landscape and motivations
1.2. Analytics and Big Data
1.3. Industry standardization for Big Data
1.3.1. Hadoop
1.3.2. Other implementations
1.4. Benefits and challenges

2. Big Data
2.1. What is Big Data?
2.2. Big Data versus traditional
approaches
2.2.1. RDMS
2.2.2. Grid
2.3. Enablers of Big Data
2.4. Big Data concepts
2.5. Big Data components

3. Hadoop
3.1. What is Hadoop?
3.2. History and apache
3.3. Apache Hadoop ecosystem
3.4. Hadoop implementations

4. Hadoop MapReduce

5. HDFS
5.1. What is HDFS?
5.2. The challenge of storage
5.3. HDFS design
5.4. HDFS concepts
5.5. Managing the data
5.6. Hadoop I/O

6. Hadoop Common
6.1.
6.2.
6.3.
6.4.
6.5.
6.6.
6.7.
6.8.

Coordination (Zookeeper)
R/W access (HBase)
Metadata (Hive)
Languages/compilers (Pig, Hive)
Data mining (Mahout)
Workflow/scheduling (Oozie)
Data integration (Flume, Sqoop)
UI framework (Hue)

7. Major Industry Players


7.1.
7.2.
7.3.
7.4.

IBM, Software AG
HP, SAP
Oracle, EMC
Microsoft, Cloudera

8. Case Study of Big Data

4.1. What is MapReduce?


4.2. History of MapReduce
4.3. Data analysis
4.3.1. Scheduling
4.3.2. Sorting
4.3.3. Task execution

2015 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727


+1.972.664.0727

v1.0

95

Cloud Computing Fundamentals


Instructor Led | Duration: 1 Day

Cloud computing is transforming enterprise IT in ways few could have ever foreseen at the dawn to the Internet revolution. This course provides a technical
introduction to the key concepts and technologies behind cloud solutions. The course begins with an introduction to cloud computing and virtualization
fundamentals which provides the basis for cloud implantations. We then discuss the high level architecture of the cloud services and explain the requirements
that need to be provided by the cloud infrastructure such as image store, compute allocation, network allocation, memory backup, etc. Along the way, each
student will design and build a virtual network.

Intended Audience

Course Outline

This course is designed for those in the technical/project/program


management roles who need to develop good conceptual understanding of
a cloud infrastructure.

1. The Big Picture of Cloud IaaS

Learning Objectives

2. Virtualization and Cloud


Fundamentals

After completing this course, the student will be able to:

Discuss the market drivers behind the move toward network


transformation
Define the Virtualization concepts as well as Cloud IaaS
Discuss the capabilities and limitations of Cloud Infrastructures
List the basic IaaS services and identify their roles
Sketch IaaSs Logical and Physical architectures.
Describe various redundancy schemes provided by a Cloud
Infrastructure
List capabilities of role-based authentication and control for user
management
Show a virtual machine lifecycle management process in a Cloud
Infrastructure
List various monitoring and alarming capabilities of a Cloud
Infrastructure
List key deployment considerations

Suggested Prerequisites:

96

1.1. Networking, computing and storage


1.2. Orchestration

2.1. Physical vs. Virtualized


2.2. Hypervisor What and why?
2.2.1. Resource Virtualization
2.2.2. Resource segregation
2.2.3. VM life cycle and APIs
2.3. Hypervisor vs. containers
2.4. Cloud IaaS What and why?

3. IaaS Capabilities and Limitations


3.1. Brief history and releases
3.2. Key capabilities
3.2.1. Multi-tenanancy
3.2.2. Administration
3.2.3. Role-based authentication
3.2.4. Lifecycle management
3.2.5. System availability/durability
3.2.6. Storage
3.2.7. Flavors
3.3. Limitations

4. Cloud Infrastructure Architecture


4.1. Cloud Infrastructure components
and architecture
4.2. Supporting systems
4.3. Cloud Infrastructure services on
physical hosts and physical
networks
4.4. Cloud segregation techniques

5. IaaS Operations
5.1. End-to-end operation of creating
a tenant network
5.2. IaaS operational management
5.2.1. Demand management
5.2.2. Change management
5.2.3. Monitoring and alarms
5.3. Multi-tenant concept
5.4. Orchestration

6. An Exercise
6.1. Build and configure a virtual
network using Cloud Infrastructure

Basic understanding of IP networking and computing is required

2015 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com


www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727
+1.972.664.0727

v1.0

Mobile CSP Network Architecture and Operations


Instructor Led | Duration: 2 Days | Course Number: NWTF705c

Communication Service Providers (CSPs) are on the cusp of a multitude of network and business transformation choices. This session is designed to provide a good
technical understanding of the current CSP network architecture and operations with focus on 4G LTE mobile networks as mobile CSPs are at the forefront of this
transformation. The session starts with an end-to-end 4G LTE network architecture including RAN, EPC, Backhaul, Backbone (IP/MPLS) and services networks
(IMS/legacy service). We then cover end-to-end LTE session set up and mobility scenarios to show practical implementation not just the 3GPP standards based
operations. We follow this discussion on various IMS/VoLTE/RCS scenarios including registration and session setup, interworking with legacy, E911, CSFB, eCSFB,
and eSRVCC. The session also includes discussion of Ethernet, IP/VPN, Mobile VPN and other wired services and their architecture.

Intended Audience

Course Outline

This is a technical course, primarily intended for a technical audience


requiring a technical introduction to the architecture of a Mobile CSP.

Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to:
Communicate effectively with CSP network personnel
Articulate the complexity of current CSP networks in Access, Core,
Transport and Services areas
Sketch practical 4GLTE network architecture
Sketch practical enterprise Ethernet access and IP VPN services
architecture
Sketch end-to-end LTE session setup
Mobile originated and mobile terminated
Discuss different mobility scenarios
RAN, EPC, service level mobility
Illustrate various VoLTE scenarios
VoLTE to VoLTE
VoLTE to PSTN
Mobility between VoLTE and non-VoLTE
List KPIs for CSP networks

1. End-to-End CSP Architecture


1.1. 2G/3G/4G mobile network
1.1.1. RAN
1.1.2. EPC
1.2. Transport network
1.2.1. Backbone IP/MPLS
network
1.2.2. Ethernet Backhaul network
1.3. Service network
1.3.1. IMS/VoLTE/RCS
1.3.2. Legacy services
1.3.2.1. SMS
1.3.2.2. MMS
1.3.3. OSS/BSS

2. 4G/LTE Operations
2.1. Attach
2.2. End-to-end data session setup
2.3. Mobility scenarios
2.3.1. RAN mobility
2.3.2. IP mobility
2.3.3. Service mobility
2.4. LTE KPI and performance

3.5. RCS session setup


3.6. E911
3.7. Interworking with 3G
3.7.1. CSFB/eCSFB
3.7.2. eSRVCC
3.8. IMS/VoLTE KPI and performance
considerations

4. Impact of LTE-A on CSPs


4.1.
4.2.
4.3.
4.4.
4.5.

eMBMS
HetNet
Coordinated MultiPoint
Small Cells
Device-to-device

5. CSP Network Wireline Services


5.1. VPN services
5.1.1. Ethernet access service
5.1.2. IP VPN services for
enterprises
5.1.3. Mobile VPN services
5.2. Content delivery network

3. IMS/VoLTE/RCS Operations

Suggested Prerequisites
Welcome to Mobile CSP Network Transformation (eLearning)

3.1.
3.2.
3.3.
3.4.

IMS registration
End-to-end VoLTE call setup
Interworking with PSTN
RCS What and why?

2015 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727


+1.972.664.0727

v1.0

97

Exploring Network Transformation with Cloud, SDN, NFV, API and Big Data
Instructor Led | Duration: 2 Days | Course Number: NWTF204

The Mobile Communication Service Provider (CSP) business and network transformation continues, largely driven by new technologies and economic
realities. A good conceptual understanding of the new networking and CSP business paradigms is essential for professionals in the communication industry.
The recent roll out of a 4G all IP network, and in parallel new ways of improving network utilization, are being realized through the introduction of advanced IT
technologies in the telecom domain. Cloud, Virtualization, open source software, and emerging networking technologies such as NFV and SDN promise even
more improvements in network economics. This course provides a broad review of all of the primary drivers and technologies expected to be the foundation of
tomorrows mobile CSP networks.

Intended Audience

Course Outline

This session is intended for leaders in technology organizations interested


in learning about the technologies and drivers for Network Transformation
at Mobile CSPs.

1.1. Business drivers


1.2. Vision of future CSP network

2. What is Virtualization?

Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to:
List the business drivers for the CSP network transformation
Describe key operational impacts to mobile CSP organizations
Discuss fundamental technical concepts and value proposition
behind SDN
Discuss fundamental technical concepts and value proposition
behind NFV
Discuss fundamental technology concepts and value proposition
behind OpenStack cloud IaaS
Discuss fundamental technology concepts and value proposition
behind RAN densification and Cloud RAN
Discuss fundamental technology concepts and value proposition
behind Big Data and network analytics
Discuss fundamental technology concepts and value proposition
behind APIs
Sketch the conceptual vision of transformed CSP networks
Show how these technologies interwork with each other
Discuss possible deployment & architectural choices for CSPs
Describe role of orchestration and
List key challenges and possible migration paths

98

1. The Network Transformation

2.1. Virtualization overview


2.2. Hypervisor architecture
2.3. Hypervisor tasks

3. Cloud with OpenStack IaaS

3.1. Role of Clouds in network


transformation
3.2. What is OpenStack?
3.3. Why OpenStack?
3.4. OpenStack technologies and terms
3.5. OpenStack architecture and
components
3.6. OpenStack operations

4. Software Defined Networking (SDN)


4.1. SDN What and why?
4.2. Role of SDN in network
transformation
4.3. SDN technologies and terms
4.4. SDN architecture and components
4.5. SDN operations with OpenFlow
4.6. Migration to SDN

5. Network Functions Virtualization (NFV)


5.1. NFV What and why?
5.2. Role of NFV in network
transformation
5.3. NFV technologies and terms
5.4. NFV architecture and components
5.5. NFV operations

2015 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com


www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727
+1.972.664.0727

5.6. Migration to NFV

6. Application Programming Interface


(API)

6.1. API What and why?


6.2. Role of API in network
transformation
6.3. API technologies and terms
6.4. API architecture and components
6.5. RESTful API operations

7. Densification and Cloud-RAN

7.1. Densification What and why?


7.2. Densification technologies
7.2.1. Small Cells, DAS, WiFi
7.3. Cloud-RAN What and why?
7.4. Cloud-RAN architecture and
components
7.5. Cloud-RAN operations

8. Big Data and Network Analytics

8.1. Big Data- What and why?


8.2. Role of big data in network and
business transformation
8.3. Big data technologies and terms
8.4. Big data architecture
8.5. Big data operations

9. Putting It All Together

9.1. End-to-end transformed network


architecture
9.2. Deployment considerations
9.2.1. Architecture design
9.2.2. Capacity planning
9.2.3. Network integration and
testing
v1.0

Software-Defined Networking (SDN) Essentials


Instructor Led | Duration: 1 Day

Software Defined Networking (SDN) is a relatively new concept within the industry and has recently gained traction. Standards and implementations of SDN
are still evolving as the industry grapples with this potentially significant technology transformation. SDN proposes to take the traditional implementation of
the networking and dis-assemble it. SDN is a collection of technologies that split the data, control and management planes of the network. By doing this, the
expectation is that it will improve network flexibility, manageability and allow the network administrator to customize the operations and services of the
network on a large scale. The student will be introduced to SDN concepts and standards. The student will learn about the interface between NFV and other
Network Transformation Technologies. Various SDN related protocols and migration strategies will be discussed as well as SDN use cases.

Intended Audience

Course Outline

This is an overview class, intended for a non-technical audience an interest


in understanding key concepts in Software Defined Networking (SDN).

1.1. SDN, NFV, Cloud

2. SDN Overview and Architecture

Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to:

1. SDN in Network Transformation

Describe Software Defined Networking


List the motivations for SDN
List the competing standards for SDN
Sketch the SDN architecture
List the functions of SDN components
Discuss the Southbound Protocols
Describe Network Functions Virtualization
Discuss some applications for SDN
Discuss the requirements on the Northbound API
List the SDN migration strategies

Suggested Prerequisites
Good understanding of IP networking concepts

2.1.
2.2.
2.3.
2.4.
2.5.
2.6.
2.7.

SDN benefits and challenges


SDN supporting standards
Pre-SDN Distributed routing
SDN architecture and framework
SDN deployment options
SDN principles
SDN interfaces (No; So; East; West)

5. SDN Migration
5.1. DevOps
5.1.1. Dual mode IT
5.1.2. DevOps tools
5.1.3. Agile psychology
5.2. Requirements of North Bound
Interface (NBI)
5.3. SDN switch hybrid mode
5.4. SDN and Cloud connection

3. SDN Operation
3.1. Separation of control plane and data
plane
3.2. Key SDN protocols
3.3. SDN traffic flow
3.4. Services and services chaining
3.5. Use case - Network optimization
3.6. Use case Traffic steering

4. SDN Programmability
4.1. Northbound and Southbound
interfaces
4.2. NFV interface with SDN
4.3. Modern (SDN) programmability
4.3.1. Characteristics
4.3.2. Pub-sub (loose coupling)
4.3.3. REST API introduction

2015 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727


+1.972.664.0727

v1.0

99

Exploring Software-Defined Networking (SDN) for Network Operators


Instructor Led | Duration: 2 Days | Course Number: NWTF704c

Software Defined Networking (SDN) is a relatively new concept within the industry and has recently gained traction. Standards and implementations of SDN
are still evolving as the industry grapples with this potentially significant technology transformation. SDN proposes to take the traditional implementation of
the networking and dis-assemble it. SDN is a collection of technologies that split the data, control and management planes of the network. By doing this, the
expectation is that it will improve network flexibility, manageability and allow the network administrator to customize the operations and services of the
network on a large scale. Recent developments and the use of virtualization and Cloud Computing are some of the key enablers of this transformation. The
course emphasizes use cases which are applicable to network operators with a discussion of the industry landscape and motivation behind deploying SDN.

Intended Audience

Course Outline

This is a technical overview for network operators. It is intended for a


technical audience that has knowledge of packet networking and an
interest in understanding key concepts in Software Defined Networking
(SDN).

Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to:

Describe Software Defined Networking


List the motivations for SDN
List the competing standards for SDN
Sketch the SDN architecture
Discuss the Southbound Protocols
List the operational difference between the Southbound Protocols
Discuss the role of OpenStack in SDN
Discuss some applications for SDN
Discuss the requirements on the Northbound API
Identify SDN Use Cases applicable to a network operator

Suggested Prerequisites
Welcome to IP Networking (eLearning) or equivalent prior knowledge

100

1. SDN in Network Transformation


1.1. SDN , NFV, Cloud

2. SDN Overview
2.1.
2.2.
2.3.
2.4.

What is SDN?
SDN benefits and challenges
Supporting standards
SDN in DC and WAN

3. SDN Architecture
3.1.
3.2.
3.3.
3.4.
3.5.
3.6.

SDN architecture and framework


SDN deployment options
SDN principles
SDN interfaces (No; So; East; West)
OpenFlow alternatives
Use case - Mobile traffic
management

4. SDN Operation
4.1. Separation of control plane and data
plane
4.2. Network Virtualization layer
(FlowVisor)
4.3. Key SDN protocols
4.4. SDN traffic flow
4.5. Services and services chaining
4.6. Migration to SDN
4.7. Use Case - Increasing WAN
utilization

2015 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com


www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727
+1.972.664.0727

5. SDN Programmability
5.1. Traditional programmability
5.2. Modern (SDN) programmability
5.2.1. Characteristics
5.2.2. Pub-sub (loose coupling)
5.2.3. Example: Traffic steering
5.2.4. OpenStack and SDN
5.2.5. I2RS and PCEP
5.2.6. Service chaining
5.3. Use Case - Inter-cell interference
management
5.4. Use case CellSDN architecture

6. SDN Configuration vs. Control


6.1.
6.2.
6.3.
6.4.
6.5.

Benefits of centralized control


Configuration protocols
Control protocols
Configuration and control together
Switch statistics vs. configuration
vs. control
6.6. Information feedback to OAM
6.7. Demonstration YANG and
NETCONF

v1.0

Software-Defined Networking (SDN) Hands-On Workshop


Instructor Led | Duration: 3 Days | Course Number: NWTF402

Software-Defined Networking (SDN) is an emerging technology in telecom networks. It is different from, but has many synergies with other new technologies like cloud
computing and Network Function Virtualization (NFV). Many network devices (e.g. S-GW, P-GW in LTE, even generic routers) have logically separate control and data
planes. SDN is based on three principles; (1) Separate the control planes from the data planes, (2) centralize the control plane functionality in an SDN Controller (data
plane remains distributed), (3) provide a new Application Plane which enables business application needs to directly impact the operation of the network
(programmability). This class will review various SDN concepts, then focus on illustrating the operation of the SDN network through a series of user exercises. The
student will be provided several open source modeling tools like Mininet along with a simulated telecom network. The class then goes through a series of progressive
SDN exercises from the basic connection of the SDN switch to the SDN Controller to modeling a network fault and how SDN performs the fault detection and recovery.

Intended Audience

Course Outline

This class is intended for a technical audience that has knowledge of SDN
and an understanding of networking concepts.

Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to:
Show SDN switch capability and network topology discovery
Demonstrate SDN passive monitoring
Differentiate between Proactive and Reactive Forwarding
Configure a new element in an existing network
Modify a network configuration with a new flow
Illustrate the use of Restful APIs on the Northbound interface
Contrast OpenFlow with NETCONF southbound protocols
Illustrate Open vSwitch functionality in the switches
Illustrate the use of VLANs
Demonstrate fault management in an SDN network
Demonstrate tunneling in SDN
Demonstrate Service Policy establishment and QoS in SDN
Trace an end-to-end packet flow through the various VLANs and IP
subnets that make up the mobility network

1. Preview of SDN Workshop


1.1.
1.2.
1.3.
1.4.
1.5.
1.6.

SDN Overview
SDL Lab Overview and Objectives
Review of lab software tools
Lab frame capture via Wireshark
Network startup procedures
Exercise: Intro to lab software,
OpenFlow initialization sequence

2. Lab modeling Concepts


2.1.
2.2.
2.3.
2.4.
2.5.
2.6.
2.7.

Virtualization in SDN
Southbound Interface options
Flow table overview
Mininet topology with python script
Open Virtual Switch (OVS)
Adding or modifying flows
Exercise: Creating custom ntwk
topology. Beginning flow rule issues.
Switch ports and interfaces

3. Normal SDN Flow functions


3.1. VLAN configuration and operation
3.2. Adding a new network element in the
data plane
3.3. Passive Monitoring
3.4. Proactive vs Reactive Forwarding
3.5. Add new Flow Endpoint
3.6. Exercise: Add flow rules using
OpenDaylight SDN

2015 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com


www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727
+1.972.664.0727

4. OpenDayLight
4.1. Connect GUI to OpenDayLight
Controller
4.2. Use of GUI to analyze traces
4.3. Add new flows via GUI
4.4. Exercise: Floodlight controller,
flow rule details, Open vSwitch

5. SDN troubleshooting
5.1. Use of ping and traceroute in
SDN
5.2. Fault detection and Recovery
5.3. Packet flow analysis and
debugging
5.4. Interpretation of flow statistics
5.5. Exercise: Northbound REST API,
Orchestration

6. SDN Northbound Interface


6.1.
6.2.
6.3.
6.4.
6.5.

Overview of REST, JSON, XML


OpenDayLight NB RESTful API
Use of Curl and Browser plugin
Contrast RESTful vs GUI APIs
Exercise: SDN virtualization(s),
VXLAN

7. Orchestration
7.1. Portal and SDN Orchestration
7.2. SDN Orchestration using
Northbound Interface API
7.3. QoS and Service Policies in SDN

v1.0

101

Software-Defined Networking (SDN) Troubleshooting Workshop


Instructor Led | Duration: 2 Days

Software-Defined Networking (SDN) is a relatively new concept within the industry and has recently gained traction. Standards and implementations of SDN
are still evolving as the industry grapples with this potentially significant technology transformation. SDN proposes to take the traditional implementation of
the networking and dis-assemble it. SDN is a collection of technologies that split the data, control and management planes of the network and this class will
give an overview of potential problem areas within an SDN network. After describing debug tools, we will analyze the details of the North Bound Interface (NBI)
and the South Bound Interface (SBI). We will study examples of message traffic on these interfaces. We will debug several types of flow rules in SDN switches.
The class will include examples of YANG data modeling language and the NETCONF configuration protocol.

Intended Audience

Course Outline

This is an in-depth technical class, intended for a technical audience that


has knowledge of SDN concepts and an interest in understanding key
concepts underlying Software Defined Networking (SDN).

After completing this course, the student will be able to:


Describe Software Defined Networking
Name important SDN controllers
Create a simulated SDN controller/network environment
List the functions of SDN components
Describe the contents of REST API messages
Define problems which may occur in SDN switch flow rules
Summarize parameters of SDN flow rules
Describe Network Functions Virtualization
Illustrate the use of SDN debug tools
Differentiate between hypervisor, virtual machine, and container

Suggested Prerequisites
Software-Defined Networking (SDN) Hands-On Workshop (Instructor
Led)

102

1.1. Troubleshooting in the SDN/NFV


World

2. SDN Controller issues

Learning Objectives

1. SDN Troubleshooting - Big Picture

2.1. SDN network simulation


2.2. Starting and stopping SDN
controllers
2.3. SDN controller GUIs
2.4. SDN controller components
2.5. SDN controller interface with
operating system
2.6. Exercise Using Ping to debug flow
rules in SDN switches
2.7. Exercise Troubleshooting SDN
controller/switch interface

3. SDN Configuration vs. Control


Protocols

3.1. Difference between configuration and


control
3.2. Yang and NETCONF
3.2.1. Yang to Yin conversion
3.2.2. NETCONF datastores
3.3. SDN Protocol details
3.4. Problems in switch flow rules:
3.4.1. Single packet debug
techniques
3.4.2. How matching works
3.4.3. Multi-table rules
3.4.4. Exercise Fixing OpenFlow
rule errors

2015 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com


www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727
+1.972.664.0727

4. SDN API Programmability

4.1. REST VS SOAP API concepts


4.1.1. REST and SOAP debug
tools
4.2. Issues related to changing APIs
4.3. Python scripting for REST APIs
4.3.1. XML and JSON tables
4.3.2. Python libraries for REST
APIs
4.3.3. Analyzing REST problems
with Wireshark
4.3.4. Exercise Using Apigee
REST APIs

5. SDN and Virtualization Problems

5.1. Basic Linux debug tools


5.2. Compare types of virtualization
5.3. Changing hypervisor and VM
parameters
5.4. Heavyweight VS lightweight
virtualization
5.5. Understanding system log
messages
5.6. Exercise connecting Docker
containers
5.7. Exercise connecting VMs in a
public cloud

v1.0

Exploring Network Functions Virtualization (NFV)


Instructor Led | Duration: 2 Days | Course Number: NWTF203

Network Functions Virtualization (NFV) is a relatively new concept within the industry. Standards for NFV are still evolving as the industry grapples with this
potentially significant technology transformation. NFV proposes to leverage standard IT virtualization technology to consolidate network equipment types onto
industry standard high volume servers, switches and storage. NFV is expected to reduce cost, improve network flexibility, manageability and allow the network
administrator to customize the operations of the network on a large scale. The course starts with a discussion of the motivation behind deploying NFV. The
course also provides an overview of the NFV architecture, NFV requirements and challenges, various enablers in the context of the LTE and IMS network
functions. The course also discusses the integration of NFV and Software Defined Networking (SDN) technologies.

Intended Audience

Course Outline

This is a technical course, primarily intended for a technical audience


requiring a technical introduction to the application of NFV network.

Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to:

Define NFV in the context of LTE and IMS network functions


Describe virtualization, cloud computing and its service models
Discuss the NFV reference architecture and building blocks
Identify the Key NFV requirements and benefit
Discuss the role and performance aspects of hypervisors
Define the NFV building blocks: Virtualization of Compute, Network
and Storage
Describe complementary technologies such as SOA, SDN and CC
Contrast Current LTE and IMS architecture with LTE and IMS using
NFV
Illustrate how SND and NFV can complement each other
List the impacts of NFV on LTE and IMS network design
List the impacts of NFV on LTE and IMS network operations

Suggested Prerequisites
Working knowledge of LTE
Working knowledge of IMS
Working knowledge of SDN and Cloud Computing (IaaS)

1. NFV Overview
1.1.
1.2.
1.3.
1.4.

Why NFV?
NFV definition
NFV overview and architecture
NFV requirements and benefits

2. Virtualization Concepts I

2.1. Virtualization overview


2.2. Server virtualization
2.2.1. Hypervisor
2.2.2. Virtual machine
2.2.3. VM management
2.3. Network and storage virtualization

3. Virtualization Concepts II

3.1. Virtualized network issues


3.1.1. Loose coupling
3.1.2. Orchestration
3.1.3. Parallel processing
3.1.4. Geographic dispersion
3.2. Example: Virtualized IMS and LTE
3.3. Exercise: Virtualization concepts

4. NFV Architecture
4.1.
4.2.
4.3.
4.4.
4.5.
4.6.

NFV standards foundation


NFV architectural framework
NFV challenges
VNF and VNF forwarding graphs
VMware vs. OpenStack
NFV Ex: Mobile base station

5. Virtualization in NFV

5.1. Virtualization big picture


5.2. Compute virtualization
5.3. Storage virtualization

2015 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com


www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727
+1.972.664.0727

5.4. Network virtualization


5.4.1. OpenFlow

6. NFV Deployment Scenarios


6.1.
6.2.
6.3.
6.4.

NFVI as a Service (NFVIaaS)


VNF as a Service (VNFaaS)
VNP as a Service (VNPaaS)
Exercise: Deployment

7. NFV Applied to LTE


7.1.
7.2.
7.3.
7.4.
7.5.
7.6.

LTE overview
NFV options for LTE
Operational issues
Migration to NFV
Troubleshooting
Exercise: NFV LTE

8.1.
8.2.
8.3.
8.4.
8.5.
8.6.

IMS overview
NFV options for IMS
Operational issues
Migration to NFV
Troubleshooting
Exercise: NFV IMS

A.1.
A.2.
A.3.
A.4.
A.5.
A.6.
A.7.
A.8.

SOA (2)
Cloud Computing (XaaS)
SDN and OpenFlow
SDN for IMS core
Benefits and challenges of SDN
NFV and SDN integration
Example of SDN and NFV
Exercise: NFV-SDN

8. NFV Applied to IMS

Appendix A: NFV Enablers

v2.2

103

Exploring NFV as Application of OpenStack and SDN


Instructor Led | Duration: 1 Day

Network Functions Virtualization (NFV) is a relatively new concept within the industry. Standards for NFV are still evolving as the industry grapples with this
potentially significant technology transformation. OpenStack is an open source cloud infrastructure technology that has been developed over the past few
years. OpenStack, SDN, and NFV can be deployed together, with OpenStack playing the role of the NFV MANO. Together OpenStack can provide some key
operational, capacity, and redundancy services for NFV. The course focuses on how NFV can work with OpenStack and SDN. It provides an overview of the NFV
architecture and a discussion on how OpenStack can provide MANO, monitoring, capacity, and redundancy services. The course also discusses some of the
NFV used cases and OpenStack will interact with SDN technologies.

Course Outline

Intended Audience
This is a technical course, primarily intended for a technical audience
requiring a technical understanding of how NFV can utilize OpenStack and
SDN.

Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to:
Articulate the NFV Framework, Terms, Concepts, Templates for
Portability, and how they are used in the instantiation of a VNF-Set
Identify NFV Requirements, as defined by ETSI, and Apply the
OpenStack & SDN features that address them.
Discuss VNF WorkLoad Resource Consumption, PNF to VNF-Set
Performance analysis, and Categorize HW Features that
dramatically improve VNF Performance.
Identify the Operations paradigm shift (PNF to VNF) brought on by
SDNs transformation of Physical to Logical networking shift.
Show how SDN will support the key NFV operational issues of
instantiation, migration, fail-over, and redundancy

Suggested Prerequisites

104

Working knowledge of LTE


Working knowledge of IMS
Working knowledge of SDN
Software-Defined Networking (SDN) Essentials (Instructor Led)

1. NFV Framework
1.1. NFV definition
1.2. NFV architectural framework
1.3. VNF and VNF Forwarding Graphs

2. NFV and OpenStack


2.1. How does OpenStack meet the NFV
requirements?
2.2. Using OpenStack as NFV Orchistrator
2.3. OpenStack, SDN and Forwarding
Graphs

3. NFV Performance Analysis

6. NFV Use Cases


6.1. Instantiation/Deletion of a VNF
6.2. Migration of a VNF
6.3. Fail-Over of a VNF
6.3.1. VNF Redundancy
Strategies
6.3.2. OpenStack provides
redundancy
6.3.3. VNF hot standby
6.3.4. Stateless VNFs and
pooling

3.1. OpenStack Monitoring Options


3.2. OpenStack and SDN Configuration
impact on performance
3.2.1. Bottle-neck analysis
3.2.2. Geographical Impact

4. NFV Security
4.1. Network Security
4.2. VLANs, SDN, and OpenStack
4.3. Topology Policy Enforcement

5. Operations Paradigm Shift


5.1. Managing a network from an
OpenStack perspective
5.2. Network Management from an NFV
perspective
5.3. Interworking with SDN

2015Award
Award
Solutions,
Inc.www.awardsolutions.com
www.awardsolutions.com+1.972.664.0727
+1.972.664.0727
2015
Solutions,
Inc.

v1.0

NFV Application Planning and Design Workshop


Instructor Led | Duration: 3 Days

As a Mobile Communication Service Provider (CSP) transforms their network with the deployment of NFV, the challenge of network planning moves from an
individual network function perspective to that of the Network Functions Virtualization Infrastructure (NFVI) perspective. This course is focused on the
compute, networking, and storage requirements that the NFVI needs to support to operate all of the VNFs that the Mobile CSP need to deploy.

Intended Audience

Course Outline

This session is intended for leaders in technology organizations interested


in learning about the technologies and drivers for Network Transformation
at Mobile CSPs.

Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to:
Draw the NFV architecture
Describe the difference in network planning of PNFs and VNFs
Discuss the resource planning models of compute, network, and
storage of the NFVI
Discuss the VNF deployment options on NFVI planning
Discuss the role of SDN on network resource planning
Discuss the impact of orchestration on NFVI planning including the
resources required to run the NFV-O
Discuss impact of the deployment and architectural choices of CSPs
on the NFVI resources needed

Suggested Prerequisites
Welcome to Mobile CSP Network Transformation (eLearning)

1. NFV Architecture
1.1. NFVI
1.2. VNFs
1.3. MANO options

2. Network Planning in a Virtual World


2.1. Planning hardware
2.2. MANO and planning
2.3. Resource planning vs. Virtual
resource planning

3. NFVI Planning

6. Impact of Orchestration on NFVI


Planning
6.1. Redundancy strategy and NFVI
planning
6.2. MANO resource planning
6.3. Impact of NFV-O and VIM options
on planning

7. Putting It All Together


7.1. End-to-end transformed network
planning model

3.1. Compute resource planning


3.2. Network resource planning
3.3. Storage resource planning

4. VNF Impact on NFVI Planning


4.1. Monitoring requirements of a VNF
4.2. Redundancy requirements of a VNF
4.3. Impact of VNF location on NFVI
planning

5. SDN and Network Planning


5.1. Role of SDN and VIM
5.2. Impact of SDN on network resources
5.3. Virtual link planning vs. link planning

2015 Award
AwardSolutions,
Solutions,Inc.
Inc. www.awardsolutions.com
www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727
+1.972.664.0727
2015

v1.0

105

NFV Application Troubleshooting Workshop


Instructor Led | Duration: 3 Days

Network Functions Virtualization brings IT-ization of Networks to Communication Service Provider networks. This transformation brings with it a completely
different paradigm of troubleshooting Network Services (NS) and VNFs. This workshop provides hands-on learning on the tools and techniques for
troubleshooting a network service or VNFs in this new environment. The course begins with a summary of fundamental shifts in troubleshooting between
physical node based infrastructure versus a cloud infrastructure based NFV Infrastructure. We then conduct an end to end path tracing exercise to understand
and reinforce the success path for the service setup. After a discussion on the general concepts of failure and fault isolation the course gets into a scenario
based hands-on analysis of various kinds of operation faults and failures for NFV.

Intended Audience

Course Outline

This course is designed for professionals in the industry who need to


develop good conceptual understanding of OpenStack.

1. NFV Architecture and Troubleshooting

Learning Objectives

2. End-to-End Path Tracing

After completing this course, the student will be able to:

106

Isolate issues between VNF and NFVI along organizational


ownership
Interpret network traces, Cloud Infrastructure(NFVI) log files to
extract useful information for analysis and problem isolation
Identify and verify key cloud resource settings for the given
application using cloud infrastructure (NFVI) and other tools
Apply knowledge about the underlying NFVI to analyze VNF
impacting failures and recovery mechanisms
Sketch the redundancy scheme as implemented by the NFVI and
troubleshoot redundancy issues
Identify impact of SDN on NFV related troubleshooting
Isolate impacted sessions due to failure of a VNF
Use VNF and NFVI counters, traces and logs to verify the operation
of the VNFs
Interpret and modify various descriptors and repository
information
Draw an end-to-end connectivity diagram with key identifiers in a
mixed virtual and physical environment:
Control Plane
Traffic Plane

1.1. NFV architecture and operations


1.2. Fundamental shift in troubleshooting

2.1. Network service/VNF specific end-toend scenario


2.2. Identify the tracing and logging
capabilities along the path
2.3. Enable VNF, VIM, OSS and 3rd party
tools for tracing and logging
2.4. Capture the logs and traces
2.5. Analyze the success case
2.6. Correlate the VNF and NFVI layer
information

3. General Failure Points and Issue


Isolation

3.1. Identify the points of failure along the


success path
3.2. Inject a failure at selected point
depending on the VNF
3.3. Capture logs/traces using VNFs, VIM,
OSS and third party tools
3.4. Methodically analyze the information
to isolate the issue

4. Redundancy Related Failure

4.1. Force a VNF redundancy failure


4.2. Capture messaging and logs at the
NFV layer
4.3. Collect appropriate logs at the VIM
layer
4.4. Analyze NFV and VIM layer
information to isolate root cause

2015 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com


www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727
+1.972.664.0727

5. Scale Up/Scale Out Failure

5.1. Create a VNF scale out failure


5.2. Capture logs at the NFV layer
5.3. Collect logs at the VIM layer
5.4. Analyze both NFV and VIM layer
info to isolate root cause
5.5. Modify descriptor or VIM
configuration to resolve the issue

6. Link Failure
6.1.
6.2.
6.3.
6.4.

Induce a link failure


Capture logs at the NFV layer
Collect logs at the VIM layer
Analyze both NFV and VIM layer
info to isolate root cause
6.5. Create a work around

7. Configuration Related Failure

7.1. Inject a configuration failure at


NFVI layer
7.2. Capture logs at the NFV layer
7.3. Collect logs at the VIM layer
7.4. Analyze both NFV and VIM layer
info to isolate root cause
7.5. Develop a workaround solution

8. Load Balancing Issue

8.1. Create a failure in load balancing


8.2. Capture messaging and logs at the
NFV layer
8.3. Collect appropriate logs at the VIM
layer
8.4. Analyze both NFV and VIM layer
info to isolate root cause
8.5. Develop a workaround solution
v1.0

OpenStack IaaS Cloud Essentials


Instructor Led | Duration: 1 Day

Cloud computing is transforming enterprise IT in ways few could have ever foreseen at the dawn to the Internet revolution. OpenStack is the open source
Infrastructure as a Service (IaaS) solution for building and managing shared clouds. This course provides a technical introduction to the key concepts and
technologies behind OpenStack IaaS solution. The course begins with an introduction to cloud computing and virtualization fundamentals which provides the
basis for OpenStack IaaS implemtation. We then discuss the high level architecture of the OpenStack IaaS and explain the functionality provided by each of
the key services such as Glance, Nova, Glance, Quantum/Neutron, Cinder and Swift. For each service the course provides software architecture as well as
how various APIs and operations take place to accomplish the function. Along the way, each student will design and build a Virtual Network using OpenStack.

Intended Audience

Course Outline

This course is designed for those in the technical/project/program


management roles who need to develop good conceptual understanding of
OpenStack.

1. The Big Picture of Cloud IaaS

Learning Objectives

2. Virtualization and Cloud


Fundamentals

After completing this course, the student will be able to:

Discuss the market drivers behind the move toward network


transformation
Define the Virtualization concepts as well as Cloud IaaS
Discuss the capabilities and limitations of an OpenStack IaaS
List the basic OpenStack services and identify their roles
Sketch OpenStacks Logical and Physical architectures.
Describe various redundancy schemes provided by OpenStack
IaaS
List capabilities of role-based authentication and control for
OpenStack user management
Show a virtual machine lifecycle management process in
OpenStack IaaS
List various monitoring and alarming capabilities of OpenStack
Iaas
List key deployment considerations

Suggested Prerequisites:

Basic understanding of IP networking and computing is required.

1.1. Networking, computing and storage


1.2. Orchestration

2.1. Physical vs. Virtualized


2.2. Hypervisor What and why?
2.2.1. Resource Virtualization
2.2.2. Resource segregation
2.2.3. VM life cycle and APIs
2.3. Hypervisor vs. containers
2.4. Cloud IaaS What and why?

3. OpenStack IaaS Capabilities and


Limitations
3.1. Brief history and releases
3.2. Key capabilities
3.2.1. Multi-tenanancy
3.2.2. Administration
3.2.3. Role-based authentication
3.2.4. Lifecycle management
3.2.5. System availability/durability
3.2.6. Storage
3.2.7. Flavors
3.3. Limitations

2015 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727


+1.972.664.0727

4. OpenStack IaaS Architecture


4.1. OpenStack components and
architecture
4.2. Supporting systems
4.3. OpenStack services on physical
hosts and physical networks
4.4. Cloud segregation techniques

5. IaaS Operations
5.1. End-to-end operation of creating
a tenant network
5.2. IaaS operational management
5.2.1. Demand management
5.2.2. Change management
5.2.3. Monitoring and alarms
5.3. Multi-tenant concept
5.4. Orchestration

6. An Exercise
6.1. Build and configure a virtual
network using OpenStack IaaS

v1.0

107

OpenStack Cloud Hands-On Workshop


Instructor Led | Duration: 4 Days | Course Number: NWTF401

Competitive advantages of business agility drives the need for responsive and flexible IT infrastructure; which can be slow and expensive. The lead time to
procure, install, configure, and commission new HW can take weeks. Cloud Computing IaaS brings speed, agility, scalability, and availability with lower CapEx
and OpEx. This hands-on workshop is conducted in a Production Communication Service Provider context. Hands-on operational exercises are provided with
detailed explanations of OpenStacks component implementation, along with basic troubleshooting. Participants become Tenants and create multi-tiered
network topologies and web service applications, enabling the participant to more adeptly deploy and support Cloud applications in an IaaS environment.

Intended Audience

Course Outline

This course is designed for professionals in the communications industry


who wish to quickly build their knowledge of OpenStack to effectively:
operate, manage, support, and debug OpenStack IaaS deployments.

Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to:

Identify the benefits and applications of IaaS and OpenStack


Diagram OpenStacks logical and physical architectures
Trace OpenStack components, their capabilities, and interactions
across the DataCenter physical networks
Provision, manage, and monitor resource pools (compute,
network, and storage) in a Cloud Computing Center
Associate failure behavior to problem discovery, employ isolation
techniques using log file and service state analysis, determining
appropriate recovery procedures for problem resolution
Contrast the benefits and considerations of cloud deployments
regarding: cloud partitioning of services over physical host
deployments, Cloud segregation (Cells, Regions, Zones, Host
Aggregates), High Availability considerations vs SPOF, and
performance considerations.

Required Equipment
This course requires an understanding of IT infrastructure and familiarity
with basic Linux CLI commands. Each student should bring a laptop with
the PuTTY ssh client installed, to be used for direct access into Award
Solutions OpenStack IaaS (Linux environment).

108

1. Introduction to OpenStack IaaS


1.1. OpenStack components and
architecture, and supporting
systems
1.2. OpenStack services on physical
hosts and physical networks
1.3. Cloud segregation techniques

2. Identity Service (Keystone)


2.1. Keystone concepts
2.2. Keystone authentication and
authorization policy enforcement.
2.3. Keystone database and service
catalogue

3. Compute Service (Nova)


3.1. Nova capabilities, components and
service daemons
3.2. Nova under-the-hood VM
provisioning trace
3.3. Scheduler and filter algorithms

4. Image Service (Glance)


4.1. Glance overview capabilities and
concepts
4.2. Glance services

2015 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com


www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727
+1.972.664.0727

5. Networking Service (Neutron)


5.1. Networking capabilities,
components and service agents
5.2. Network use cases
5.3. Under-the-hood implementation
5.4. Network frame trace

6. Block Storage Service (Cinder)


6.1. Cinder overview
6.2. Cinder architecture
6.3. Cinder volume management,
configuration and log files

7. Object Service (Swift)


7.1. Swift capabilities, architecture
and service daemons
7.2. Account, Container, Object WalkThrough
7.3. Swift deployment considerations

8. Orchestration (Heat)
8.1. Capabilities, components and
service daemons
8.2. Heat Stack templates

9. Telemetry Service (Ceilometer)


9.1. Capabilities, components and
service daemons

10. Database Service (Trove)


10.1. Capabilities, components and
service daemons
v1.2

Architecting and Building an OpenStack IaaS (Basic)


Instructor Led (Hands-On) | Duration: 3 Days

Cloud Computing is transforming enterprise IT as well as communication service provider networks. OpenStack is the open source Infrastructure as a Service (IaaS)
solution for building and managing shared clouds. Building an Openstack IaaS in your lab or data center can be intimidating, complex, and requires significant
engineering. This 3-day hands-on course leads the participant through discussions on architectural tradeoffs, and guides them through the step-by-step process
building of OpenStack IaaS from ground zero. The course begins with a technical discussion on OpenStack services, data bases, and agents. We then discuss the
networking aspects to lay the foundation for the IaaS architecture exercise. After the architecture is completed, the participants start building the IaaS starting with the
control node, then the network node, followed by the compute nodes and storage nodes. The course concludes with a validation test by building tenant networks.
Please note that this course intentionally uses manual approach as opposed to automated tools to enable participants get thorough under-the-hood understanding.

Intended Audience

Course Outline

This course is designed for IT professionals in the industry who need to


create, operate, and maintain OpenStack IaaS. The participant is expected
to have a good understanding of OpenStack under the hood mechanics.
This is an expert-led lecture with exercises involved in the building of a
functional OpenStack IaaS.

Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to:

Planning, designing, and engineering an OpenStack IaaS


Architect OpenStack services, databases, and agents to physical
hosts, based on performance constraints and scalability tradeoffs
Architect OpenStack networking strategies based on performance
constraints and scalability tradeoffs
Installation, configuration, and realization of the designed and
planned architecture
Implement basic security mechanisms and Role-Based Access
Control (RBAC) implementation
Locate and edit Linux as well as OpenStack configuration files to
modify IaaS
Locate and parse log files to perform basic validation and
debugging
Perform validation and debugging of OpenStack of services

1.1. Inter-service communications


1.1.1. APIs
1.1.2. Agents and daemons
1.1.3. AMQP
1.2. OpenStack databases

2. Networks

2.1. Types of networks


2.1.1. Management
2.1.2. Data tunnels
2.1.2.1. GRE vs. VLAN
2.1.3. Storage
2.1.4. External connectivity
2.1.5. API network
2.2. Traffic Patterns across these
networks
2.3. Architectural tradeoffs

3. Layout an IaaS Architecture

3.1. OpenStack services and agents


3.1.1. Map to physical hosts
3.1.2. Tradeoffs
3.2. Network address planning
3.3. RBAC policy
3.4. Inter-services password planning

4. Cloud Controller

Suggested Prerequisite

1. Overview of OpenStack Services and


Agents

A good understanding of Linux operating system as Sys Admin


OpenStack Cloud Hands-On Workshop (Instructor Led)

4.1. Installation
4.2. Configuration
4.2.1. Config file modifications
4.3. Validation and debugging
4.3.1. OpenStack commands

2015 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727


+1.972.664.0727

4.3.2. Parse log files in logical


sequence
4.4. RBAC policies and enforcement

5. Network Node

5.1. Installation
5.2. Configuration
5.2.1. Config file modifications
5.3. Validation and debugging
5.3.1. OpenStack commands
5.3.2. Parse log files in logical
sequence

6. Compute Nodes

6.1. Installation
6.2. Configuration
6.2.1. Config file modifications
6.3. Validation and debugging
6.3.1. OpenStack commands
6.3.2. Parse log files in logical
sequence

7. Storage Nodes

7.1. Installation
7.2. Configuration
7.2.1. Config file modifications
7.3. Validation and debugging
7.3.1. OpenStack commands
7.3.2. Parse log files in logical
sequence

8. End-to-End Validation and Testing


8.1. Multi-Tennant PaaS Validation
8.1.1. Compute
8.1.2. Storage
8.1.3. Network
8.1.4. Routers

v1.0

109

110

2015 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727

Wireless
Landscape
The wireless industry is continuing to go through a fast-paced transition. Award Solutions has assembled a comprehensive curriculum suitable to both
individuals new to the wireless industry as well as industry veterans who wish to learn more about wireless networks. It is important for individuals in
the wireline and wireless industry to fully understand the fundamentals of wireless networks they are expected to design, deploy and support. Wireless
network fundamentals require a solid foundation in 2G and 3G technologies, IP technologies, and the technologies that are enabling interactions
between the wireless and traditional wireline technologies.

SELF-PACED eLEARNING COURSES

[FUND106] Wi-Fi Overview (e)


[FUND104] Welcome to Wireless Networks (e)
[UMTS102] Welcome to UMTS (e)
[UMTS103] Overview of UMTS (e)
[UMTS104] UMTS/WCDMA Air Interface Fundamentals (e)
[UMTS105] UMTS Signaling (e)
[UMTS106] UMTS Mobility (e)
[UMTS109] HSPA+ Overview (R7) (e)

INSTRUCTOR LED COURSES

[TRND204] Wi-Fi Technical Overview


Exploring Wireless Landscape, IP Convergence, and 4G
[FUND203] Exploring Wireless Technologies and Networks
[FUND204] Fundamentals of RF Engineering
[FUND201] Exploring GSM/EGPRS/UMTS/HSPA/HSPA+

Fundamentals of RF Engineering Instructor Led Course

2015 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727

111

Wi-Fi Overview

eLearning | Average Duration: 3 hours | Course Number: FUND106


Wireless Fidelity (Wi-Fi) is becoming as ubiquitous as microwaves in enterprises, home offices and hotspots. This eLearning course offers a quick and concise
overview of the Wi-Fi network and architecture. It begins with an overview of the current landscape of wireless networks, describing where Wi-Fi fits. The WiFi network architecture and its components are introduced to provide an end-to-end view of the Wi-Fi network along with various applications of the
technology, different flavors of Wi-Fi technologies and the landscape of Wi-Fi related technologies. The end-to-end view of a Wi-Fi connection setup and traffic
flow is also explored.

Intended Audience

Knowledge Knuggets

This course is an overview of Wi-Fi and designed for a broad audience,


including customer support, operations, sales/marketing, product and
project management and those in engineering who want a broad overview
of Wi-Fi.

Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to:
Describe Wi-Fis place in the landscape of wireless networks
Sketch the Wi-Fi network architecture and its interfaces
List key applications on Wi-Fi such as local area wireless
connectivity, VPN, VoIP, and FMC
List and define various 802.11 based air interface Wi-Fi
technologies
Sketch how Wi-Fi fits into existing enterprise networks
Identify the options for Wi-Fi deployment

Suggested Prerequisites
Welcome to IP Networking (eLearning)

1. Motivation and Overview


1.1. History of Wi-Fi and 802.11
1.2. Current state of wireless networks
1.3. Drivers for Wi-Fi networks

Put It All Together


Assess the knowledge of the participant
based on the objectives of the course

2. Wi-Fi Architecture
2.1. Wi-Fi Network architecture and
topology
2.2. Deployment scenarios (enterprise,
hotspot, home office)
3. Wi-Fi Technology Overview and

standards

3.1. Technology overview


3.2. Family of 802.11 and evolution from
802.11b to 802.11n
3.3. Overview of 802.11i, 802.11e and
802.11s

4. End to End Connection Setup

4.1. Walk through of connection setup


4.2. End-to-end flow

5. Wi-Fi Applications

5.1. Internet access


5.2. Enterprise/VPN access
5.3. Voice over Wi-Fi

6. Security over Wi-Fi

6.1. Security and authentication


6.2. WEP and AES
6.3. Application layer security

7. Wi-Fi Deployment Scenarios


7.1. Coverage and capacity
7.2. Unlicensed bands

112

2015 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727


+1.972.664.0727

v3.0

Welcome to Wireless Networks

eLearning | Average Duration: 1 hour | Course Number: FUND104


Wireless communications have come a long way from early implementations to todays wide offering of available services. This course provides an introductory
overview of mobile wireless communication along with a brief history of the evolution of wireless communications from early systems to todays capabilities.
Fundamentals of mobile wireless networks and their functions are described. A high level description of mobile wireless services and their delivery to the
mobile subscriber is also provided. Participants are not required to be technically oriented to benefit from this course. At the conclusion of this course,
participants will have a familiarity with mobile wireless communications, the fundamental components of the network and their functions, as well as
operations required to deliver basic service.

Intended Audience

Knowledge Knuggets

This course is for participants who are new to the wireless industry or
desire a general level understanding of wireless communications.
Participants are not required to be technically oriented to benefit from this
course.

Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to:

Identify characteristics of wireless communications


List advantages of a wireless mobile system
Identify basic wireless network elements
List external networks and services
Identify challenges in providing a mobile radio network
Describe basic wireless service delivery

1. Introduction
2. Wireless History

2.1. Characteristics of pre cellular radio


telephony
2.2. Evolution of key cellular radio
concepts
2.3. Characteristics of first generation
wireless (1G)
2.4. Characteristics of second generation
wireless (2G)
2.5. Characteristics of third Generation
wireless (3G)

Put It All Together


Assess the knowledge of the participant
based on the objectives of the course

3. Wireless Fundamentals
3.1. Advantages of wireless mobile
systems
3.2. Wireless mobile network elements
and connections to external world
3.3. Transport media on a simple level
and role it plays in wireless
3.4. External networks/services to which
mobiles connect
3.5. Challenges and considerations in
providing a mobile radio network
3.6. Aspects of a mobile network carrier

4. Wireless Service Delivery


4.1. Steps involved in a mobile
registration
4.2. Steps involved in a typical voice call
4.3. Steps involved in a typical data call

+1.972.664.0727
2015
2015 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727

v3.0

113

Welcome To UMTS

eLearning | Average Duration: 1.5 hours | Course Number: UMTS102


Wireless communications have come a long way from early implementations to todays wide offering of available services. This course provides a UMTS
overview of mobile wireless communications. Mobile wireless networks, their elements and their functions are described. A description of mobile wireless
services and their delivery to the mobile subscriber is also provided. There is a brief look at the evolution of UMTS to 4G technologies. This course is intended
for individuals who desire a general understanding of mobile wireless communications focused on UMTS. Participants are not required to be technically
oriented to benefit from this course. At the conclusion of this course, participants will have a familiarity with mobile wireless communications, the networks
and their elements, their functions and operations required to deliver voice and data service.

Intended Audience

Knowledge Knuggets

This course is intended for individuals who are new to the wireless industry
or desire a general level understanding of wireless communications.
Participants are not required to be technically oriented to benefit from this
course.

Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to:

List the key motivations for moving from 2G to 3G


Identify the difference between GSM/GPRS and UMTS
Identify UMTS network elements and their functions
Describe UMTS Service Delivery call flows
Describe the evolution moving forward from UMTS

Suggested Prerequisites
Welcome to Wireless Networks (eLearning)

1. Introduction
2. History from 2G to 3G
2.1.
2.2.
2.3.
2.4.
2.5.

Evolution of wireless technologies


2G limitations
2.5G technology
Evolution from 2.5G to 3G
Why UMTS

3. UMTS Network
3.1.
3.2.
3.3.
3.4.
3.5.
3.6.
3.7.
3.8.
3.9.

What is UMTS
Wideband CDMA
Comparison of technologies
GSM/GPRS 2G networks
GSM/GPRS 2.5G networks
UMTS network
UMTS Radio network
Interface core network and UTRAN
UMTS key features

4. Service Delivery
4.1.
4.2.
4.3.
4.4.
4.5.
4.6.
4.7.

114

Radio network acquisition


UMTS behaviors
UMTS attach
UMTS PDP context activation
Data transfer
Context deactivation and detach
Voice call flows

2015Award
Award
Solutions,
Inc.www.awardsolutions.com
www.awardsolutions.com+1.972.664.0727
+1.972.664.0727
2015
Solutions,
Inc.

5. Moving Forward from UMTS


5.1. UMTS roadmap
5.2. 3G UMTS
5.3. 3G UMTS - HSDPA
5.4. 3G UMTS HSUPA
5.5. 3G UMTS HSPA+
5.6. 3G challenges
5.7. Wish List - 4G
5.8. 4G technology requirements
5.9. 4G building blocks
5.10. Multiple access technologies
5.11. Why OFDM
5.12. Why multiple antennas
5.13. 4G architecture design goals
5.14. Network architecture evolution
5.15. 4G radio network
5.16. 4G core network components
5.17. What is LTE

Put It All Together


Assess the knowledge of the participant
based on the objectives of the course

v2.0

Overview of UMTS

eLearning | Average Duration: 2 hours | Course Number: UMTS103


UMTS creates a platform to converge the worlds of speech, data services and the Internet to create a global market for mobile multimedia. This course
discusses the broad scope of UMTS, its characteristics, its features and its evolution from second generation architecture. It also provides the student with a
sampler, which draws the attention of the students to various areas of UMTS such as the access network, core network, services from voice to multimedia
and the future of UMTS.

Intended Audience

Knowledge Knuggets

This course is intended for anyone seeking an overview of UMTS, its


features and capabilities.

Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to:
Provide a summary of the limitations of 2G wireless networks
Explain the key characteristics of 3G systems and the genesis of
UMTS
Highlight key features of UMTS networks
Describe the UMTS standards releases and their functionality
Identify the elements of the UMTS architecture and understand their
interfaces
Describe traffic delivery of circuit switched and packet switched
information within the UMTS network

1. Introduction
1.1.
1.2.
1.3.
1.4.

Applications
Capabilities of 1G and 2G systems
Limitations of 2G
Requirements of 3G

2. 3G Characteristics
2.1. Key 3G characteristics
2.2. Requirements of 3G

3. Genesis of UMTS

7. UMTS Scenarios
7.1. Establish a CS call
7.2. Establish a PS call
7.3. UMTS traffic delivery

8. Summary
Put It All Together
Assess the knowledge of the participant
based on the objectives of the course

3.1. UMTS standards development


3.2. Modes of operation
3.3. Spectrum allocation

4. Key Features of UMTS


4.1. Backward compatibility with
GSM/GPRS/EDGE open interfaces
4.2. UMTS QoS classes

5. UMTS Road map of Releases


5.1. Sequence
5.2. Features in each release

6. UMTS Architecture
6.1.
6.2.
6.3.
6.4.

Technology landscape
Core network architecture
UTRAN architecture
UMTS interfaces

2015 Award
AwardSolutions,
Solutions,Inc.
Inc.www.awardsolutions.com
www.awardsolutions.com+1.972.664.0727
+1.972.664.0727
2015

v5.0

115

UMTS/WCDMA Air Interface Fundamentals


eLearning | Average Duration: 3 hours | Course Number: UMTS104

UMTS is an evolution of GSM and GPRS. The air interface has been changed from a Time Division Multiple Access (TDMA) based system to a Wideband Code
Division Multiple Access (WCDMA) based air interface. This change was required to achieve the data rate of 2 Mbps to the mobile, which is a 3G requirement.
This course provides the details of the UMTS WCDMA air interface, known as UMTS Terrestrial Radio Access (UTRA). The WCDMA physical layer is key to
achieving higher data rates and supporting new features. This course provides an overview of the physical layer. In addition, power control and soft handover,
important features of any CDMA air interface, are discussed. The UMTS defined radio interface includes a number of channels, which are presented with an
explanation of their usage. This course concludes with a discussion of how high data rates and multiple simultaneous services are delivered using UMTS.

Intended Audience

This course is intended for those seeking a detailed understanding of the


WCDMA air interface that is used in UMTS. This includes those in a design,
test, systems engineering, sales engineering network engineering, or
verification role.
After completing this course, the student will be able to:
Explain spreading factor codes in UMTS WCDMA
Describe the use of scrambling codes for source identification in
both the uplink and downlink in WCDMA
Describe power control operations in the UMTS WCDMA system
Explain the basics of soft handoff processing from the perspective
of the physical layer
Identify the features designed into the WCDMA system which enable
high data rates
Describe the types of channels found in the UMTS radio interface
and their purpose
Explain how concurrent services are supported by UMTS radio
interface

Overview of UMTS (eLearning)

Complementary Courses
UMTS Signaling (eLearning)
UMTS Mobility (eLearning)

116

1. UMTS WCDMA Overview


1.1. Introduction to Wideband CDMA

2. UMTS WCDMA Channels


2.1. Overview of UMTS channel structure

3. WCDMA Physical Layer Processing

Learning Objectives

Suggested Prerequisites

Knowledge Knuggets

3.1. Protection of data


3.2. Separation channels
3.3. Scrambling codes

7.3. Communication of information


between the UE and the network

8. Summary
Put It All Together
Assess the knowledge of the participant
based on the objectives of the course

4. WCDMA Power Control


4.1. Introduction to power control
4.2. Requirements of power control
4.3. WCDMA power control process

5. Soft Handover in WCDMA


5.1. Introduction to soft handover
5.2. The RAKE receiver
5.3. Inter radio access technology
handover procedure

6. Delivering High Data Rates in UMTS


6.1. Variable length spreading factors
6.2. Impact of protection on data rates
6.3. How to achieve 2 Mbps
6.3.1. QPSK modulation
6.3.2. Multiple codes

7. Concurrent Services, an Air Interface


Perspective
7.1. Support of multiple simultaneous
services by the mobile
7.2. Support concurrent services

2015 Award
Award
Solutions,
Inc.www.awardsolutions.com
www.awardsolutions.com+1.972.664.0727
+1.972.664.0727
2015
Solutions,
Inc.

v2.0

UMTS Signaling

eLearning | Average Duration: 1 hour | Course Number: UMTS105


The need for a 3G network to provide more value added services to wireless subscribers has become apparent. UMTS provides a new, "open"
communications universe that will allow service providers to supply a host of new services. All of these services are offered in UMTS using two basic
mechanisms. The first is circuit switched call setup to support the traditional voice based services. The second is packet-switched data session establishment.
This is used to establish data sessions based on the services bandwidth and Quality of Service requirements. This course offers an eLearning experience of
UMTS signaling. This course also discusses the processes of establishing a circuit-switched voice call and a packet-switched data session.

Intended Audience

This course is intended for those seeking a detailed understanding of the


WCDMA air interface that is used in UMTS. This includes those in a design,
test, systems engineering, sales engineering network engineering, or
verification role.

Learning Objectives

After completing this course, the student will be able to:


Highlight the differences between user plane and control plane
Specify different radio access signaling and core network signaling
protocols
Define the basic circuit-switched call setup in UMTS
Explain how the signaling and control mechanisms are used in
UMTS
Define the Always connected paradigm in UMTS networks
Describe traffic delivery of packet data information within the UMTS
network

Suggested Prerequisites

Overview of UMTS (eLearning)

Complementary Courses
UMTS Mobility (eLearning)

Knowledge Knuggets

1. Signaling and User Traffic in UMTS


1.1. Signaling responsibilities of network
elements
1.2. Overview of the UMTS signaling (or
control) plane
1.3. Overview of the UMTS traffic (or user)
plane
1.4. UMTS radio access signaling
mechanisms
1.5. UMTS core network signaling
mechanisms
1.6. Signaling protocols on the Iub, Iur
and Iu interfaces

4. Summary
Put It All Together
Assess the knowledge of the participant
based on the objectives of the course

2. Making a Circuit Switched Phone Call


in UMTS
2.1. Call establishment process
2.2. Information that is exchanged during
call establishment
2.3. Circuit switched core network
protocol model

3. Starting a Packet Session in UMTS


3.1. UMTS support for the Always
connected paradigm
3.2. Data session establishment process
3.3. Information that is exchanged in
data session establishment
3.4. Tunneling
3.5. Packet switched core network
protocol model

2015Award
Award
Solutions,
Inc.www.awardsolutions.com
www.awardsolutions.com+1.972.664.0727
+1.972.664.0727
2015
Solutions,
Inc.

v2.0

117

UMTS Mobility

eLearning | Average Duration: 1 hour | Course Number: UMTS106


UMTS is designed to provide value-added services, many of which will allow the subscriber to receive services while on the move. This course discusses the
process of managing mobility in UMTS networks. Mobility management is required while the mobile is idle, in a circuit-switched voice call or in a packetswitched data session. This course covers all these aspects of mobility. In addition, certain UMTS specific mobility features are discussed, and the
participants are provided with an understanding of the mobility aspects of the UMTS network.

Intended Audience

This course is intended for those seeking a detailed understanding of the


processes of signaling and mobility management during a call or a packet
session. This includes those in a design, test, systems engineering, sales
engineering, network engineering, and verification.

Learning Objectives

After completing this course, the student will be able to:


Describe the UMTS radio mobility aspects
Define the requirements of location management within the UMTS
network
Discuss core network mobility including location areas and routing
areas
Illustrate the differences between mobility when the mobile is idle
and when the mobile is connected
Explain the mobility management messaging used to support
mobility in UMTS

Suggested Prerequisites

Overview of UMTS (eLearning)

Complementary Courses
UMTS Signaling (eLearning)

Knowledge Knuggets

1. Mobility Management in UMTS


1.1. Introduction to Mobility Management
functions
1.2. Mobility Management responsibilities

2. Mobility Management when the


Mobile is Idle
2.1. Location tracking when the mobile is
in idle mode
2.2. Responsibilities of the mobile in idle
mode

5. Seamless Mobility in UMTS


5.1. Requirements of seamless
mobility
5.2. Procedures for seamless mobility

6. Summary
Put It All Together
Assess the knowledge of the participant
based on the objectives of the course

3. Mobility Management when the


Mobile is Connected
3.1. Location tracking when the mobile is
connected to the network
3.2. Responsibilities of the mobile when
it is connected
3.3. Mobility management procedures
when the mobile is using common
channels
3.4. Mobility management procedures
when the mobile is using dedicated
channels

4. Serving Radio Network Controller


(SRNC) Relocation
4.1. Responsibilities of the SRNC
4.2. Support provided by the DRNC
4.3. Procedures used in SRNC relocation

118

2015Award
Award
Solutions,
Inc.www.awardsolutions.com
www.awardsolutions.com+1.972.664.0727
+1.972.664.0727
2015
Solutions,
Inc.

v2.0

HSPA+ Overview (R7)

eLearning | Average Duration: 4 hours | Course Number: UMTS109


UMTS is a 3G cellular technology that is being deployed around the globe to support voice and packet data services. The air interface of the first release of
UMTS (i.e., Release 99) is enhanced by the HSDPA feature of Release 5 and the HSUPA feature of Release 6. Release 7 enhances the UMTS air interface even
further to achieve high peak data rates such as 21 or 28 Mbps in the downlink and 11 Mbps in the uplink. This course provides an overview of the major
enhancements to HSPA (R6) that lead to high peak data rates and lower latency provided in HSPA+. Examples of the topics covered include architecture
enhancements, High Order Modulation (HOM), MIMO (Multiple Input Multiple Output), CPC (Continuous Packet Connectivity), and radio channel
enhancements. The call setup in HSPA+ is illustrated, and both downlink data transmission and uplink data transmission are discussed.

Intended Audience

Knowledge Knuggets

This course is intended for those seeking an understanding of HSUPA+


technology and how it enhances downlink and uplink data transfer. This
includes those in product management, design, test, systems engineering,
sales engineering, network engineering, RF deployment engineering, and
field engineering and operations roles.

1. Introduction
1.1.
1.2.
1.3.
1.4.

Evolution of UMTS
Capabilities and limitations of HSPA
Performance goals for HSPA+
Main features and benefits of HSPA+

2. Key Concepts of HSPA+

Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to:
List key features, benefits and limitations of HSPA+
Sketch the architectural enhancements in HSPA+
Discuss the key concepts in HSPA+ to achieve high packet data
rates in the downlink and the uplink
Describe CPC (Continuous Packet Connectivity)
Summarize the radio channel enhancements
Walk through an end-to-end HSPA+ call flow

Suggested Prerequisites
UMTS/WCDMA Air Interface Fundamentals (eLearning)

2.1.
2.2.
2.3.
2.4.
2.5.
2.6.

7. Summary
Put It All Together
Assess the knowledge of the participant
based on the objectives of the course

High Order Modulation (HOM)


MIMO
CPC
Radio channel enhancements
Architecture options
UE categories and capabilities

3. Downlink Data Transmission


3.1. Overview of HSDPA operation
3.2. High-level view of DL transmission
3.3. HSPA+ enhancements for DL
transmission (ex: MIMO and HSSCCH less operation)

4. Uplink Data Transmission


4.1. Overview of HSUPA operation
4.2. High-level view of UL transmission
4.3. HSPA+ enhancements for UL
transmission (Ex: HOM)

5. CPC (Continuous Packet Connectivity)


5.1. Fast session setup/resumption
5.2. DTX
5.3. DRX

6. End-to-End Call Flow


6.1. End-to-end HSPA+ call flow

2015 Award
AwardSolutions,
Solutions,Inc.
Inc.www.awardsolutions.com
www.awardsolutions.com+1.972.664.0727
+1.972.664.0727
2015

v3.0

119

Wi-Fi Technical Overview

Instructor Led | Duration: 2 Days | Course Number: TRND204


The enormous popularity of Wi-Fi has led to increasing demands for enhancing the data rate and other features in these wireless networks. Wi-Fi networks have
rivaled cellular networks in terms of growth and popularity. There is much debate in the industry whether Wi-Fi competes with or complements 3G/4G networks.
Wi-Fi technology is based on evolving 802.11 set of standards. This course covers the landscape of Wi-Fi standards, details of air Interface, network operations
and deployment strategies. The course also deals with all major aspects of Wi-Fi including the possible interaction with cellular networks and future trends from
a technology and application perspective.

Intended Audience
This course is intended for individuals looking to gain an understanding of
Wi-Fi and its evolutions from the technical and usage perspectives.

Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to:

Understand the link between Wi-Fi and IEEE 802.11 standards


List the RF bands relevant for Wi-Fi
Explain the different deployment scenarios for Wi-Fi
Describe the underlying technologies of Wi-Fi such as OFDM and
MIMO
Understand the basics of the MAC in Wi-Fi and also be able to
explain features such as frame aggregation, block ACK, TXOP, RIFS
and the reverse direction protocol
Explain the security features and protection mechanisms relevant
for Wi-Fi deployments
Understand how Wi-Fi networks are gearing up for working with
cellular networks
Explain the future technology and application trends in Wi-Fi

Suggested Prerequisites
Overview of OFDM (eLearning)

Course Outline
1. Overview of Wi-Fi
1.1. Evolution of Wi-Fi and IEEE 802.11
standards
1.2. Types of Wi-Fi networks
1.3. Typical deployments
1.4. Future trends in Wi-Fi

2. Wi-Fi Air Interface Physical Layer


2.1.
2.2.
2.3.
2.4.

Evolution
Use of OFDM in Wi-Fi
Wi-Fi channels and bandwidths
Multiple antenna techniques in Wi-Fi

3. Wi-Fi Air Interface MAC Layer


3.1. Principles in Wi-Fi
3.2. Advanced features

4. Quality of Service in Wi-Fi Networks


4.1. QoS features in Wi-Fi
4.2. WMM certification
4.3. Voice over Wi-Fi

5. Wi-Fi Security
5.1.
5.2.
5.3.
5.4.
5.5.

Security requirements in Wi-Fi


Evolution of security in Wi-Fi
WPA and WPA2
Wireless intrusion threats
Wireless protected setup

6. Wi-Fi Network Operations


6.1. Beacons and their role
6.2. Scanning and network discovery

120

2015Award
Award
Solutions,
www.awardsolutions.com+1.972.664.0727
+1.972.664.0727
2015
Solutions,
Inc.Inc.www.awardsolutions.com

6.3. Power save mechanisms

7. 802.11 Extensions
7.1. Roaming/fast BSS transition
802.11r
7.2. Radio resource management
802.11k
7.3. Wi-Fi network management
802.11v
7.4. Management frame protection
802.11w
7.5. External networks 802.11u

8. Future of 802.11 Radio Standards


8.1. 802.11ac and its features band of
operation, peak data rates, MUMIMO operation, usage scenarios
8.2. 802.11ad and its features band of
operations, bandwidth, peak data
rates, beamforming, and usage
scenarios

9. Wi-Fi Deployment
9.1.
9.2.
9.3.
9.4.

Hotspot deployments
Enterprise deployments
Wi-Fi /cellular integration
Wi-Fi offloading for data and/or
voice
9.5. Wi-Fi Passpoint
Certification/Hotspot 2.0
v1.1

Exploring Wireless Landscape, IP Convergence, and 4G


Instructor Led | Duration: 2 Days

A good understanding of wireless networks and IP-wireless convergence are essential building blocks for new entrants to the communication industry. This
course provides very good conceptual understanding of architecture, leading technologies and operations of 2G/3G/4G wireless and converged IP networks.
The course demystifies the terminology and acronymns commonly used in the wireless industry and helps us understand the dependencies and interactions
with other parts of the network. The course begins with a Big Picture of communications network. It then focuses on wireless technologies such as
GSM/GPRS/UMTS/HSPA+, 1x/1xEV-DO, LTE and explains their operations and supported services. Participants will learn life of a mobile in a typical wireless
network and the roles of various wireless network components and operations of services like SMS, MMS, Web browsing, VPN, email and others.

Intended Audience

Course Outline

The course is for participants with little or no wireless knowledge. The


diverse nature of this course makes it suitable for beginners in various
organizations, including those in project management, sales, marketing,
finance, system design, system test, systems and network engineering,
product planning, management, support and operations.

Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to:

Sketch the wireless technology landscape from 1G to 4G


Sketch the IP Convergence architecture
Sketch the wireless network architecture
Describe key features and benefits of CDMA (1x) and 1xEV-DO (Rev
0 and Rev A)
Describe key features and benefits of GSM/GPRS/UMTS/HSPA
Explain how mobility works in Wireless networks
Sketch the technology path for leading carriers in the world
Explain the wireless network operations, including registration, call
setup, call delivery and handovers
Understand the Key Performance Indicators (KPIs) valuable to
wireless service providers
Sketch the VoIP and IMS architectures
Show an end-to-end VoIP/IMS call scenario
Identify the need and driving forces for 3.5G and 4G
Discuss key building blocks of 4G technologies
List the key characteristics of HSPA+, LTE and WiMAX
Differentiate between CDMA, GSM, WCDMA and OFDMA
Explain the various Fixed Mobile Convergence (FMC) options

1. Prologue: Wireless and IPC Landscape


1.1. Shift in business from 1G to 4G
1.2. Shift in Technology from 1G to 4G
1.2.1. Which carrier is doing what?
1.2.2. Which vendor is doing what?
1.3. Network of networks
1.4. IP convergence and FMC
1.4.1. Motivation
1.4.2. Carrier and enterprise

2. GSM/GPRS/EDGE/UMTS/HSPA
2.1.
2.2.
2.3.
2.4.
2.5.
2.6.

Network architecture
Technology overview
Capabilities, benefits and challenges
Identities in GSM/GPRS and UMTS
SIM card and its benefits
Life of a mobile: Operations
2.6.1. Registration/location update
2.6.2. Call Setup, Paging, Mobility

3. CDMA - 1x and 1xEV-DO Rev 0/Rev A


3.1.
3.2.
3.3.
3.4.
3.5.

Technology concepts
1x and 1xEV-DO network architecture
Capabilities, benefits and challenges
Life of a mobile in 1x and 1xEV-DO
Mobile IP and roaming

4. Services in 3G networks
4.1. Regulatory E911, CALEA, etc.
4.2. SMS/EMS/MMS, etc.

+1.972.664.0727
2015
2015 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727

4.3. PTT
4.4. Enterprise Services - VPN, email

5. WiFi Essentials
5.1. Evolution for 820.11 family
5.2. Capabilities, benefits and
challenges

6. VoIP and IMS


6.1. The service network competitors
6.1.1. IMS/MMD
6.1.2. P2P (Skype, MS LCS, etc.)
6.2. Supporting technologies/
protocols
6.2.1. SIP/H.323/Megaco/
H.248
6.3. End-to-end call/session setup

7. LTE and 4G Networks


7.1.
7.2.
7.3.
7.4.

7.5.
7.6.
7.7.
7.8.

LTE Network architecture


LTE Technology overview
Identities in LTE
Life of a UE: Operations
7.4.1. Registration/location
update
7.4.2. Call Setup, Paging,
Mobility
WiMAX
HSPA+
MIMO What and why?
Deployment timelines and
challenges
v1.0

121

Exploring Wireless Technologies and Networks


Instructor Led | Duration: 5 Days | Course Number: FUND203

A good understanding of wireless networks and IP convergence concepts is essential for those in the wireless communication industry. This course provides a
conceptual understanding of the architecture, the leading technologies and the operations of 2G/3G/4G wireless and converged IP networks. The course
demystifies the terminology and acronyms commonly used in the wireless industry and helps new hires understand the dependencies and interactions with
other parts of the network. The course begins with a Big Picture of communications networks and then focuses on 2G/3G/4G wireless technologies,
services and operations. Participants will learn the functions of components like the HLR, MSC/VLR, BSC/RNC, BTS/Node B, PDSN/FA, Home Agent, and AAA,
and the operations of services like SMS, VPN, and email. The course concludes with a look at Wi-Fi, WPANs and WSNs as these relate to the Big Picture.

Intended Audience

The course is for participants new to mobile networks with little or no


wireless knowledge. The diverse nature of this course makes it suitable for
beginners in various organizations, including those in procurement, IT,
project management, sales, marketing, finance, system design, system
test, systems and network engineering, lawful intercept, surveillance,
product planning, management, support and operations.

Learning Objectives

After completing this course, the student will be able to:


List and classify various wireless technologies
Illustrate the wireless technology landscape from 2G to 4G
Sketch the wireless network and IP convergence architecture
Describe the key features, benefits and significance of:
CDMA (1x) and 1xEV-DO (Rev 0 and Rev A)
GSM/GPRS/EDGE UMTS/HSPA
HSPA+, LTE and WiMAX
Wi-Fi, Bluetooth and ZigBee
Differentiate between CDMA, GSM, WCDMA and OFDMA
Compare key mobility protocols (MAP, GTP, and Mobile IP)
Explain key wireless network operations, including registration,
location update, network acquisition, voice and data call setups,
handovers, roaming, authentication and authorization
Sketch a generic 2G, 3G and 4G mobile network.
List the differences between WEP, WPA1 and WPA2
Describe end-to-end email, VPN and other data call scenarios
Explain the key building blocks of 4G technologies
Differentiate between WANs, WLANs, WPANs and WSNs

Suggested Prerequisites

A general understanding of telecommunications and Internet


Protocol (IP) is recommended but not essential.

122

Course Outline

1. Wireless and IP Convergence


Landscape
1.1. Wireless technologies
1.2. IP convergence

2. Radio Network Basics


2.1. Modulation
2.2. Propagation issues
2.3. FDMA, TDMA, CDMA and OFDMA

3. GSM-EGPRS Networks - Architecture


and Key Services
3.1.
3.2.
3.3.
3.4.
3.5.

GSM architecture and key services


SIM cards
Mobility
Call setup
GPRS and EDGE

4. GSM, GPRS and EDGE Technology and


Features
4.1.
4.2.
4.3.
4.4.
4.5.
4.6.
4.7.

Air interface fundamentals


Power control
Modulation and coding
Idle mode, paging and DRX
System access
Voice and DTX
Handovers

5. UMTS R99
5.1.
5.2.
5.3.
5.4.
5.5.

WCDMA
Channelization and scrambling codes
Power control
Mobility and handover
UTRAN

2015 Award
Award
Solutions,
Inc.www.awardsolutions.com
www.awardsolutions.com+1.972.664.0727
+1.972.664.0727
2015
Solutions,
Inc.

6. HSPA and IMS


6.1. HSDPA
6.2. HSUPA
6.3. UMTS IMS architecture

7. CDMA2000 1x
7.1. 1x voice call setup
7.2. 1x data call setup
7.3. 1x mobility and power control

8. 1xEV-DO
8.1.
8.2.
8.3.
8.4.

System architecture
Forward and reverse links
Data call setup
Mobility

9. 3.5G and 4G Technologies and


Networks
9.1. LTE and WiMAX
9.2. Seamless mobility

10. Wi-Fi and Bluetooth Essentials


10.1. Wi-Fi features and Security
10.2. Bluetooth and Zigbee

11. Voice and Data Services in 3G


Networks
11.1. Consumer services
11.2. Regulatory and enterprise
services
11.3. WIN and CAMEL
11.4. WAP, MMS, LCS and LI
11.5. VPNs and Email
11.6. Streaming media
11.7. Push-to-talk
v1.5

Fundamentals of RF Engineering

Instructor Led | Duration: 2 Days | Course Number: FUND204


A strong understanding of RF engineering fundamentals is required to optimize the performance of cellular networks. This course presents the fundamentals
of RF engineering for new engineers who need to be grounded in the fundamentals and existing engineers who need to fill in any gaps they may have in their
understanding. This course illustrates the network architecture and highlights the importance of several aspects of RF engineering. The RF propagation
mechanisms that affect the RF signal path from the transmitter to the receiver are discussed. Coverage is discussed using the link budget examples for 3G
and 4G systems. Capacity engineering is described from the perspective of voice and data traffic requirements and backhaul provisioning. Deployments of
WCDMA and LTE networks are considered. Finally, tools useful for network planning/design, deployment, and optimization are reviewed.

Course Outline

Intended Audience
This fundamentals course is intended for new or experienced RF engineers
who need familiarity with the fundamentals of RF engineering.

1. Overview of GSM/UMTS/LTE

Learning Objectives

2. Introduction to Cellular RF Engineering

After completing this course, the student will be able to:

Sketch the network architecture for 2G, 3G and 4G


Outline KPIs that quantify RF performance
Discuss the roles of various RF components
Describe RF propagation mechanisms
Explain various components of the link budget
Summarize the approaches used for capacity provisioning
Discuss the influence of vocoders and high-speed data on traffic
engineering
Contrast WCDMA deployment with LTE deployment
Describe issues with equipment sharing between 3G and 4G
Explain how tools can be used during various stages of the cellular
network (e.g., design, deployment, and optimization)

1.1. GSM, UMTS, LTE architecture


1.2. Evolution from GSM to LTE
2.1. Stages of technology deployment
2.2. Planning, design, engineering,
optimization
2.3. Radio and core, backhaul, network
economics (CapEx/OpEx, KPIs)
2.4. Importance of RF engineering

3. Review of RF Components
3.1. Baseband and RF processing
3.2. Antennas (basic principles, omni and
sectorized)
3.3. Feeders, jumpers, duplexers and
diplexers
3.4. HPA, LNA, TMA, repeaters

4. RF Propagation Fundamentals
4.1. RF Terms (RSSI, SIR, dB, dBm)
4.2. Distance-based path loss, long-term
fading, and short-term fading
4.3. Propagation models
4.4. Spectrum for network deployment

5. WCDMA and LTE Fundamentals


5.1.
5.2.
5.3.
5.4.

UTRAN and E-UTRAN architectures


PHY layer functions
Handover
HSPA and LTE

+1.972.664.0727
2015
2015 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727

6. Coverage and Link Budget


Fundamentals
6.1.
6.2.
6.3.
6.4.

Significance of link budget


3G and 4G link budgets
Influence of carrier frequency
Challenges of an overlay network

7. Capacity and Traffic Engineering


7.1. Voice calls and capacity models
7.2. Influence of AMR and high-speed
data
7.3. Backhaul provisioning
7.4. RF technology factors impacting
capacity

8. Deployment Considerations
8.1. WCDMA vs. LTE
8.2. 3G- and 4G-specific features for
enhanced RF
8.3. Cell-site planning/sharing

9. Tools for Deployment and


Optimization
9.1. Network planning/design tools
9.2. Troubleshooting/KPI monitoring
tools
9.3. Drive-testing and post-processing
9.4. RF optimization approaches

v1.3

123

Exploring GSM/EGPRS/UMTS/HSPA/HSPA+
Instructor Led | Duration: 5 Days | Course Number: FUND201

3GPP-based technologies have left their mark as the most dominant wireless systems deployed globally. The success of GSM technologies in turn has given
rise to optimistic scenarios for the evolution of 3G and 4G technologies such as UMTS and LTE. This course is an in-depth look at the 3GPP family of
standards, from GSM to HSPA+. We begin our journey by gaining an understanding about the underlying GSM technology, which was designed for easy
roaming. We then cover the most important enhancement to 2G-GSM, specifically GPRS and EDGE, which facilitate efficient access to packet data networks.
3G UMTS brings not only higher data rates but also QoS, better security, multimedia and the possibility of fallback to 2G. The efficiency of UMTS is dramatically
improved with the advent of HSPA, and we will take a detailed look at how this is achieved in current deployments.

Intended Audience

Course Outline

This course is intended for those seeking thorough conceptual knowledge


of 3GPP from GSM through Release 11 (HSPA+) of UMTS. The diverse
nature of this course makes it suitable for beginners in various
organizations, including those in procurement, IT, project management,
sales, marketing, finance, system design, system test, systems and
network engineering, lawful intercept, surveillance, product planning,
management, support and operations.

Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to:
Differentiate among different 3GPP wireless technologies and
describe the driving forces behind each
Sketch different networks and interfaces in 3GPP
Describe the GSM, EGPRS and WCDMA radio technologies
Explain the motivation behind HSPA, HSPA+ and LTE
Compare and contrast the different technologies
Explain the air interface operations for each technology
Explain mobile and network operations including
registration/location update, network acquisition, voice and data
call setup, handovers and roaming for each technology
Describe interworking between different releases
Discuss how mobility is handled in each radio network
Sketch VoIP and IMS architecture and call scenarios
Illustrate end-to-end email and VPN scenarios

Suggested Prerequisites
Exploring Wireless Technologies and Networks (Instructor Led) or
equivalent experience
124

1. Introduction to 3GPP Technologies


2. GSM to EDGE
2.1. GSM
2.2. GPRS
2.3. EDGE

3. GSM Network Architecture


3.1. GSM BSS architecture
3.2. GSM NSS architecture

4. GSM Mobility and Call Processing


4.1. IMSI attach and detach
4.2. Location update
4.3. Handover

5. Introduction to UMTS
6. UMTS Terrestrial Radio Access
Network (UTRAN)
6.1. UTRAN functions
6.2. UTRAN components
6.3. UTRAN interfaces

7. UTRAN Channels and Protocols


7.1.
7.2.
7.3.
7.4.
7.5.

WCDMA terms and concepts


Channelization and scrambling codes
Power control
Handover and reselection
RRC and radio access bearers

8. Bearer Independent Circuit Switched


Core Network
8.1. MSC Servers
8.2. Media Gateways

2015 Award
Award
Solutions,
Inc.www.awardsolutions.com
www.awardsolutions.com+1.972.664.0727
+1.972.664.0727
2015
Solutions,
Inc.

9. Packet Switched Core Network


Architecture
9.1. Packet-switched protocols
9.2. Service activation
9.3. Access Point Names

10. Inter-System Procedures


10.1. Handover: UMTS to GSM
10.2. Handover UMTS to GPRS

11. UMTS IMS Architecture


11.1. IMS architecture
11.2. End-to-end VoIP call setup

12. HSDPA and HSUPA


12.1. HSDPA
12.2. HSUPA

13. Key Concepts of HSPA+


13.1. HSPA+ key features
13.2. R6 latency issues
13.3. HSPA+ flat architecture
13.4. VoIP capacity

14. HSPA+ Deployment and


Interworking
14.1. Interworking with 3GPP
14.2. Evolution of HSPA+
14.3. Interworking with other systems

15. Quality of Service


16. Wireless Data Applications
16.1. VPN tunnels
16.2. Email

17. 4G LTE
17.1. LTE Release 8 and LTE-A
v1.6

Course Index

* New Course
(e) eLearning Course

* [NWTF110] API Essentials........................................94


* [NWTF108] API Overview (e)....................................92
* Architecting and Building an OpenStack IaaS (Basic)...109
B

[NWTF103] Big Data Essentials...............................95

* [NWTF109] Big Data Overview (e)...........................93


C

* Cloud Computing Fundamentals..............................96


D

[TRND205] DAS Technical Overview........................52

* [LTE_117] eMBMS Overview (e)...............................15


* [LTE_425] eMBMS Protocols and Signaling............30

[IPC_102] Ethernet Backhaul Essentials................ 76


[IPC_122] Ethernet Backhaul Overview (e).............68
[IPC_301] Ethernet Backhaul Planning...................78
[IPC_119] Ethernet Basics (e)..................................65
[IPC_116] Ethernet Bridging (e)...............................67
[IPC_118] Ethernet VLANs (e)..................................66
Exploring GSM/EGPRS/UMTS/HSPA/HSPA+........124
[IPC_204] Exploring IMS (R8)...................................73
[LTE_207] Exploring IMS/VoLTE Networks..............33
[IPC_202] Exploring IPv6..........................................83
[IPC_205] Exploring Ethernet Backhaul.................. 77
[IPC_207] Exploring IP Routing and Ethernet Bridging...81
[IPC_203] Exploring MPLS.......................................72

[NWTF203] Exploring Network Functions Virtualization (NFV)...103

* Exploring NFV as Application of OpenStack and SDN...104

[NWTF204] Exploring Network Transformation with Cloud, SDN, NFV, API and Big Data...98

[IPC_211] Exploring TCP/IP Protocols....................... 75

* [NWTF704] Exploring Software-Defined Networking (SDN) for Network Operators...100


Exploring Wireless Landscape, IP Convergence, and 4G...121
[FUND203] Exploring Wireless Technologies and Networks...122

[FUND204] Fundamentals of RF Engineering.......123

[UMTS109] HSPA+ Overview (R7) (e)....................119

[IPC_120] Interconnecting IP Networks (e).............69


[IPC_114] IP Basics (e)............................................. 61
[IPC_101] IP Convergence Essentials...................... 71
[IPC_104] IP Convergence Overview (e)..................55

I (continued)

[IPC_109] IP Quality of Service (QoS) (e).................59


[IPC_405] IP Networking Workshop for LTE............79
[IPC_406] IP Networking Workshop for 4G Backhaul...80
[IPC_113] IP Routing (e)...........................................62
[IPC_407] IP Routing and Ethernet Bridging Workshop...82
[IPC_409] IPv6 Networking Workshop for LTE Networks...84

[LTE_111] LTE Air Interface Signaling Overview (e)...13


[LTE_101] LTE Essentials.......................................... 21
[LTE_102] LTE Overview (e)......................................11
[LTE_302] LTE Protocols and Signaling................... 27
[LTE_408] LTE RAN Capacity Planning Certification Workshop...38

[LTE_115] LTE RAN Performance Essentials..........36

[LTE_405] LTE RAN Signaling and Operations Certification..39


* [LTE_418] LTE RAN Signaling and Operations: Part 1 - Attach...40

* [LTE_419] LTE RAN Signaling and Operations: Part 2 - Mobility, QoS, Traffic...41
LTERANSignalingandOperations:Part3-Interworking(GMS/UMTS)....42
* [LTE_420]
[LTE_401] LTE RF Planning and Design Certification Workshop...37
[LTE_412] LTE RF Optimization Certification Workshop (UE Based)...45

* [LTE_421] LTE RF Optimization: Part 1 - Coverage and Accessibility...46


LTE RF Optimization: Part 2 - Downlink and Uplink Throughput...47
* [LTE_422]
* [LTE_423] LTE RF Optimization: Part 3 - Mobility and Inter-RAT...48
[LTE_103] LTE SAE Evolved Packet Core (EPC) Overview (e)...12
[LTE_205] LTE Technology Overview........................22
[LTE_114] LTE-Advanced Essentials........................23
[LTE_310] LTE-Advanced Technical Overview......... 24
[LTE_305] LTE-EPC Networks and Signaling...........28

* [LTE_313] LTE-EPC Networks and Signaling (Architecture, Attach)...29


M

[LTE_301] Mastering LTE Air Interface....................25


[LTE_309] Mastering TD-LTE Air Interface...............26

* [NWTF705] Mobile CSP Network Architecture and Operations...97


[TRND104] Multiple Antenna Techniques (e)..........19

* NFV Application Planning and Design Workshop... 105


* NFV Application Troubleshooting Workshop..........106
* [NWTF106] NFV Overview (e)...................................90
O

* OpenStack Cloud IaaS Essentials..........................107


[NWTF401] OpenStack Cloud Hands-On Workshop...108
* [NWTF107] OpenStack Cloud Overview (e)............. 91

[IPC_107] Overview of IMS (e).................................. 57


[LTE_113] Overview of IPv6 for LTE Networks (e)... 14
[IPC_106] Overview of MPLS (e)..............................56
[TRND103] Overview of OFDM (e)...........................18

2015 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727

O (continued)

[UMTS103] Overview of UMTS (e)..........................115

[IPC_115] QoS in IP Networks (e)............................63

* [LTE_415] RF Design Workshop: Part 1 - LTE..........43


* [LTE_416] RF Design Workshop: Part 2 - VoLTE and Small Cells...44
S

* [NWTF105] SDN Overview (e)..................................89

[IPC_110] Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) (e)........60


SIP and Diameter for IMS/VoLTE............................. 74
Software-Defined Networking (SDN) Essentials.....99

*
Software-Defined Networking (SDN) Hands-On Workshop...101
* [NWTF402]
* Software-Defined Networking (SDN) Troubleshooting Workshop...102
[LTE_413] Small Cell and VoLTE RF Planning and Design Certification Workshop..51
* [TRND106] Small Cell Overview (e).........................20
* [LTE_208] Small Cell RF Planning Workshop..........50
[TRND206] Small Cell Technical Overview..............49

* [LTE_424] SON: Self Organizing Network Features in LTE and LTE-Advanced...31


T

[IPC_117] TCP and Transport Layer Protocols (e)...64

[UMTS106] UMTS Mobility (e)................................118


[UMTS105] UMTS Signaling (e)..............................117
[UMTS104] UMTS/WCDMA Air Interface Fundamentals (e)..116

[LTE_203] VoLTE and IMS in LTE-EPC Networks.....34


[IPC_108] Voice and Video over IP (VoIP) Overview (e)...58
[LTE_116] VoLTE Essentials.....................................32
[LTE_112] VoLTE Overview (e).................................. 17
[LTE_427] VoLTE Signaling and Operations............35

[IPC_103] Welcome to IP Networking (e)................54


[IPC_121] Welcome to IPv6 (e)................................70
[LTE_109] Welcome to LTE (e)................................. 10

* [NWTF104] Welcome to Mobile CSP Network Transformation (e)..88


* [NWTF101] Welcome to SDN (Software-Defined Networks] (e)...86

[UMTS102] Welcome to UMTS (e).........................114

* [NWTF102] Welcome to Virtualization (e)............... 87


* [LTE_118] Welcome to VoLTE (e)............................. 16
[FUND104] Welcome to Wireless Networks (e)....113
[FUND106] Wi-Fi Overview (e)................................112
[TRND204] Wi-Fi Technical Overview....................120

125

4G LTE VoLTE LTE-ADVANCED IMS TD-LTE HSPA+ SMALL CELLS

AMERICAS HEADQUARTERS - Richardson, TX USA


Phone:
+1.972.664.0727
Toll Free: +1.877.47.AWARD
Email:
info@awardsolutions.com

EUROPE, MIDDLE EAST & AFRICA


Email:
info.emea@awardsolutions.com

ASIA & PACIFIC


Email:
info.apac@awardsolutions.com

DAS SDN NFV IP CONVERGENCE IPv6 CLOUD M2M TECHNOLOGY TRENDS

CONNECT WITH US!


www.facebook.com/AwardSolutions
www.twitter.com/AwardSolutions
www.linkedin.com/company/award-solutions
www.LTEuniversity.com

2015 Award Solutions, Inc., Edition 1.0


All rights reserved. No part of this catalog shall be reproduced or transmitted
by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or otherwise,
without the express written consent from Award Solutions, Inc.

You might also like